AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 10th Lesson Economic Statistics Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 10th Lesson Economic Statistics

Essay Questions

Question 1.
What is the relationship between Economics and Statistics? [March 18, 16]
Answer:
There is a close relationship between statistics and economics. In the words of Tugwell “The science of economics is becoming statistical in its method”. All economic laws are pronounced on the basis of statistical facts and figures. The theory of the population of Malthus, the law of family expenditure of Engels, etc., were propounded after statistical tests. Statistics help economics to become an exact science.

In the study of theoretical economics, the application and use of statistical methods are of great importance. Most of the doctrines of economics are based on the study of a large number of units and their analysis. This is done through statistical methods. The Law of demand was formulated because of statistical methods.

The importance of statistics is felt in all branches of knowledge- in accountancy and auditing in banking, in insurance in research, and many fields. Without statistics no branch of knowledge is complete.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 2.
Explain the Geometric diagrams. What are Bar diagrams and Pie diagrams?
Answer:
Diagrams are more suitable to illustrate the data which is discrete, while continuous data is better represented by graphs.

BAR DIAGRAM and PIE DIAGRAM come in the category of geometric diagrams.
The bar diagram are 3 types. Simple, Multiple and Component bar diagrams.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 1
Simple Bar Diagrams : Bar diagrams are very commonly used and is better for representation of quantitative data. Bars are simply
corresponding numerical values.
Ex: Maximum temperature recorded in Hyderabad in the 1st six months in a year in a bar diagram.

Multiple Bar Diagram : Multiple bar diagrams are used for comparing two or more sets of data.
Ex : The multiple bar diagram depicts the number of students in a college studying two foreign languages, French and German for the period 1960 – 2010 is given below.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 2
Component Bar Diagram : Component bar diagram charts also called sub-divided bar diagram, are very useful in comparing the sizes of different component parts.
Ex : Enrolment at primary level in a district of Bihar. Boys, girls and total children in the given age group are denoted in the component bar diagram is given below.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 3
Pie – Diagram : This diagram enables us to show the partitioning of total into component parts. It is also called a pie chart.
Ex : Draw the pie digram for following data.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 4
Total area = 16 + 24 + 10 + 8 + 5 = 63
Area changed into Degrees =
Paddy =\(\frac{16 \times 360}{63}\) = 91°
Wheat = \(\frac{24 \times 360}{63}\) = 137°
Maize = \(\frac{10 \times 360}{63}\) = 57°
Jower = \(\frac{8 \times 360}{63}\) = 46°
Millets = \(\frac{5 \times 360}{63}\) = 29°
Total = 360°
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 5

Question 3.
Calculate the AM in direct method of the following data.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 6
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 7
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}=\frac{\Sigma \mathrm{fx}}{\mathrm{N}}\)
Where N is total frequency
Σfx = 7160; N = 200
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = \(\frac{7160}{200}\) = 35.8
∴ \(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = 35.8

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 4.
Calculate the A.M. in Direct method.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 8
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 9
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}=\frac{\Sigma \mathrm{fx}}{\mathrm{N}}\)
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = \(\frac{3300}{100}\) = 33
∴ \(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = 33

Question 5.
Calculate the A.M. in Deviation method or Shortcut method.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 10
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 11
Here class interval (C) = 10
Assumed mean = 55
A.M. (or) \(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = A + \(\frac{1}{N}\) Σfiμi × C
= 55 + \(\frac{1}{90}\) (-44) × 10
= 55 + (-4.8)
∴ \(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = 50.2

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 6.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 12
Answer:
Calculation of Mean :
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 13
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = \(\frac{\Sigma \text { fixi }}{\mathrm{N}}=\frac{4530}{100}\) = 45.3
∴ \(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = 45.3
Calculation of Median :
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 14
Here N = 100; \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{2}\) = \(\frac{100}{2}\) = 50
50th value included in the cumulative frequency 40-49 class intervals. But here class intervals are unequal. So we can adjust that lower limit is \(\frac{39+40}{2}=\frac{79}{2}\) = 39.5.
F = 31; f = 38, C = 10
Median = L + \(\left[\frac{\frac{N}{2}-F}{f}\right]\) × C
Median = 39.5 + \(\left[\frac{50-31}{38}\right]\) × 10
= 39.5 + \(\left[\frac{19}{38}\right]\) × 10
= 39.5 + 0.5 × 10
= 39.5 + 5
= 44.5
∴ Median = 44.5
Calculation of Mode:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 15
Here the maximum frequency occurs in 40 – 49 class.
f = 38; f1 = 16; f2 = 15; C = 10
L = \(\frac{39+40}{2}=\frac{79}{2}\) = 39.5 (Lower boundary of the model class)
Mode = L + \(\left[\frac{f-f_1}{2 f-f_1+f_2}\right]\) × C
= 39.5 + \(\left[\frac{38-16}{2(38)-(16+15)}\right]\) × 10
= 39.5 + \(\left[\frac{22}{76-31}\right]\) × 10
= 39.5 + 0.48 × 10
= 39.5 + 4.5
Mode = 44.38

Short Answer Questions

Solve the problems for the following datas.

Question 1.
Calculate the Median for the following data.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 16
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 17
Here N = 100 ; \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{2}=\frac{50}{2}\) = 25
25th value included in the cumulative frequency 21-30 class intervals.
Lower limit = \(\frac{20+21}{2}=\frac{41}{2}\) = 20.5
F = 15; f = 16; C = 10 N
Median = L + \(\left[\frac{\frac{N}{2}-F}{f}\right]\) × C
Median = 20.5 + \(\left(\frac{25-15}{16}\right)\) × 10
= 20.5 + \(\left(\frac{10}{16}\right)\) × 10
= 20.5 + 0.62 × 10
= 20.5 + 6.25 = 26.75
Median = 26.75

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 2.
Calculate the Median for the following data.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 18
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 19
Here N = 125 ; \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{2}=\frac{125}{2}\) = 62.5
65th value included in the cumulative frequency 7.6
Therefore 30 – 40 in the median class
65th value appears in 30 – 40 class.
Lower limit = 30; F = 40; f = 36; C = 10 N
Median = L + \(\left[\frac{\frac{N}{2}-F}{f}\right]\) × C
Median = 30 + \(\left(\frac{62.5-40}{36}\right)\) × 10
= 30 + \(\left(\frac{22.5}{36}\right)\) × 10
= 30 + 0.625 × 10
= 30 + 6.25
= 36.25

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 3.
Calculate the Mode for the following data.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 20
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 21
Here the maximum frequency occurs in 59 – 60 class.
L = \(\frac{59+60}{2}=\frac{119}{2}\) = 59.5
f = 31, f1 = 20; f2 = 17; C = 10
Mode = L + \(\left[\frac{f-f_1}{2(f)-\left(f_1+f_2\right)}\right]\) × C
= 59.5 + \(\left[\frac{31-20}{2(31)-20+17}\right]\) × 10
= 59.5 + \(\left(\frac{11}{62-37}\right)\) × 10
= 59.5 + \(\left(\frac{11}{25}\right)\) × 10
= 59.5 + 0.44 × 10
= 59.5 + 4.4
= 63.9

Additional Questions

Question 4.
Marks of 10 students 43, 45, 68, 55, 33, 57, 40, 48, 77, 60. Calculate A.M by direct method.
Answer:
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}=\frac{\Sigma \mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{N}}\)
Where Σx = 526 ; N = 10
∴ \(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = 52.6

Question 5.
Calculate A.M from the following data by direct method.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 22
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 23
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}=\frac{\Sigma \text { fixi }}{\mathrm{N}}\) (or) \(\frac{\Sigma \mathrm{fx}}{\mathrm{n}}\)
where = Σfixi = 1870; N = 100
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}=\frac{1870}{100}\) = 18.7

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 6.
Find Median from the following data.
10, 15, 18, 21, 25, 30, 35
Answer:
Arrange asscending order
10, 15, 48, 21, 25, 30, 35
Median = \(\left(\frac{N+1}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item
= \(\left(\frac{7+1}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item = \(\left(\frac{8}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item = 4th item
4th item = 21
∴ Median = 21

Question 7.
Find median from the following data.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 24
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics 25
Where \(\) = 32.5 it lies in the 20 – 30 class interval.
So lower limit = 20; F = 15; f = 18; N = 65; C = 10
Median = L + \(\left[\frac{\frac{N}{2}-F}{f}\right]\) × C
= 20 + \(\left[\frac{32.5-15}{18}\right]\) × 10
= 20 + 9.722 = 29.72
∴ Median = 29.72

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 8.
Find the mode when median is 125.6 and mean is 128
Answer:
Mode = 3 Median – 2 Mean
= (3 × 125.6) – (2 × 128)
= 376.8 – 256
= 120.8

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is meant by Arithmetic Mean ? [March 16]
Answer:
Arithmetic Mean of a statistical data is defined as the quotient of the sum of all, the items or entries divided by the number of items.

Question 2.
Find the A.M. for the data 30, 20, 32, 16, 27. [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
\(\overline{\mathrm{X}}=\frac{\Sigma \mathrm{x}}{\mathrm{N}}=\frac{30+20+32+16+27}{5}=\frac{125}{5}\) = 25
∴ \(\overline{\mathrm{X}}\) = 25

Question 3.
Find the Median for the data 10, 20, 15, 29, 35, 42.
Answer:
The values arranged in ascending order
(i.e,) 10, 15, 20, 29, 35, 42
Median = \(\left(\frac{n+1}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item
= \(\left(\frac{6+1}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item
= \(\left(\frac{7}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item = 3.5th item
= \(\frac{20+29}{2}\) = 24.5

Question 4.
Find the value of Median for the data 19, 1, 3, 17, 6, 12, 11, 8.
Answer:
The values arranged in ascending order
i.e., 1, 3, 6, 8, 11, 12, 17, 19
Median = \(\left(\frac{n+1}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item
= \(\left(\frac{8+1}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item
= \(\left(\frac{9}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item = 4.5th value
= \(\frac{8+11}{2}=\frac{19}{2}\) = 9.5
∴ Median = 9.5

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 5.
Find the Mode for the data 17, 6, 19, 14, 8, 6, 12, 15, 6, 10.
Answer:
Mode is 6 is occuring many items i.e., 3

Question 6.
Find the Mode for the data 12, 11, 15, 11, 12 ,12, 15, 12, 9, 12. [March 18]
Answer:
Mode is 12 is occuring many items i.e 5

Question 7.
What is a Pie diagram ? [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
It is also called a pie chart. The circle is divided into many parts as there are compo-nents by drawing straight lines from the centre to the circumference.

Question 8.
What is a Bar diagram ?
Answer:
Bars are simply vertical lines, where the lengths of bars are proportional to their corresponding numerical values.

Question 9.
Find the median of the observation – 3,- 5, -8, 0, 2, -10,
Answer:
Arrange data in ascending order – 10, – 8, – 5, – 3, 0, 2
Median = \(\left(\frac{n+1}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item
= \(\left(\frac{6+1}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item
= \(\left(\frac{7}{2}\right)^{\text {th }}\) item = 3.5
= \(\frac{-5+(-3)}{2}=\frac{-8}{2}\) = -4
∴ Median = – 4

Additional Questions

Question 10.
What is mode if data is Bio-modal?
Answer:
Mode = 3 Median – 2 Mean

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 10 Economic Statistics

Question 11.
What is Median ?
Answer:
The median is a measure of central tendency, which appears in the centre of an ordered data. It is aften described as the “middle most” value. It is called a position average.

Question 12.
What is Mode?
Answer:
Mode is most frequently occuring value in data.

Question 13.
What is Simple Bar Diagram ?
Answer:
Bar diagram comprising a group of equi-spaced and equi-width rectangular bars for each class of data.

Question 14.
What is Multiple Bar Diagrams ?
Answer:
Multiple bar diagrams are used for comparing two or more set of data.

Question 15.
What is Component Bar Diagram or Sub-Divided Bar Diagram ?
Answer:
These diagrams are used to represent various parts of the total.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 9th Lesson Money, Banking and Inflation Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 9th Lesson Money, Banking and Inflation

Essay Questions

Question 1.
Examine the difficulties of the barter system.
Answer:
Barter system means exchange of goods. This system was followed in old days. But the population and its requirements are increasing, the system became very complicated. The difficulties of barter system are :

1) Lack of coincidence of wants : Under the barter system, the buyer must be willing to accept the commodity which the seller is willing to offer in exchange. The wants of both the buyer and the seller just coincide. This is called double coincidence of wants. Suppose the seller has a good and he is willing a exchange it for rice. Then the buyer must have rice and he must be willing to exchange rice for goat. If there is no such coincidence direct exchange between the buyer and the seller is not possible.

2) Lack of store value : Some commodities are perishables. They perish within a short time. It is not possible to the value of such commodities in their original form under the barter system. They should be exchanged before they actually perish.

3) Lack of divisibility of commodities : Depending upon its quantity and value, it may become necessary to divide a commodity into small units and exchange one or more units for other commodity. But all commodities are not divisible.

4) Lack of common measure of value : Under the barter system, there was no common measure value. To make exchange possible, it was necessary to determine the value of every commodity interms every other commodity.

5) Difficulty is making deferred,payments : Under barter system furture payments for present transaction, was not possible, because future exchange involved some difficulties. For example suppose it is agreed to sell specific quantity of rice in exchange for a goat on a future date keeping in view the recent value of the goat. But the value of goat may decrease or increase by that date.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 2.
Explain the functions of money.
Answer:
Money plays a vital role in modem economy. A modem economy is rightly known as monetary economy because of the crucial position that money occupies.

  1. According to ‘Robertson’ – “Anything which is widely accepted in payment for goods or it discharges of other kinds of business obligations”
  2. According to ‘Seligman’ – “One that possesses general acceptability”.
  3. According to Waker’ – “Money is what money does”.

Functions of money :
1. Primary functions :
a) Medium of exchange : Money serves as a medium of exchange. It removes the inconveniences of the barter system in which exchange of goods was possible if only there was double coincidence of wants. But money facilitates exchange of commodities without double coincidence watns. Any commodity can be exchange for money. People can exchange goods and services through the medium of money.

b) Measure of value : Money serves as a measure of the value of goods and services. As common measure of value it has removed the difficulty of the barter system and has made transactions simple and easy. The value of each commodity is expressed in the units of money. We call if the price.

2. Secondary functions : .
a) Store of value : The value of commodities and services can be stored in the form of more. Certain commodities are perishable. If they are exchanged for money before they perish, their value be preserved in .the form of money.

b) Standard of deferred payments : Money serves as a standard of deferred payments. The modern economies most of the business transactions take place on the basis of credit. An individual consumer or a business man may now purchase a commodity and pay for it in future as this function makes it possible to express future payments in terms of money.

c) Transfer of money : Money can be transferred from one person to another at any time at any place.

3. Contingent functions :
a) Measurement and distribution of National income : National income of a country be measured in money by aggregating the value of all commodities. This is not possible in a barter system similarly national income can be distributed to different factors of production making payment them in money.

b) Money equalises marginal utilises / productivities : The consumers can equalize marginal utilities of different commodities purchased by them with the help of money. We know how consumers equalize the marginal utility of the taste rupee they speed on each commodity. Similarly firms can also equalize the marginal productivities of different factors of production and maximize profits.

c) Basis of credit : Credit is created by banks from out of the primary deposits of money supply of credit, in an economy is dependent on the supply of nominal money

d) Liquidity : Money is the most important liquid asset. Interms of liquidity it is superior other assets. Money is centpercent liquid.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 3.
Write a note on the supply of money.
Answer:
The term supply of money is related to stock concept. There may be increase or decrease in the money stock over a period of time. Money supply determines the various factors i.e., rate of interest, credit availability, investment, national income and employment. This affects the general price level.
Components of money supply :
1) Currency issue by the Central Bank : Central Bank is the apex bank and enjoys the power of issue of currency. Currency consists of paper notes and coins. In India, RBI is the Central Bank and issue notes in the denominations of 1000, 500, 100, 50, 20, 10, 5 and 2 rupees. The one rupee note and coins are issued by the finance department of the government of India.

2) Demand deposits created by Commercial banks : Bank deposits are also considered as money supply. Commercial banks collect deposits from the public and creates credit out those deposits. Credit in this form is called derived or secondary deposits. This constitute nearly 80% of total money supply.
Monetary aggregates : In India money supply measured in terms of the following monetary aggregates.
M1 = Currency + demand deposits + other deposits
M2 = M1 + time liability portion of saving deposits with banks + certficates of deposits issued by banks + terms deposits maturing within one year.
M3 = M2 + term deposits over one year maturity + call term borrowings of banks,
M1, M2 and M3 as monetary measures.

Question 4.
Describe the functions of the commercial banks.
Answer:
Functions of commercial banks :
Primary functions :
a) Accepting deposits : The commercial bank just like any other money lender is doing money lending business bank receives public money in the form of deposits. The deposits mainly are of the following steps.

1) Current deposits : These deposits have two characteristics. One, there are no restrictions with regard to the amount of withdrawl and number of withdrawls. Banks normally do not pay any interest on current account deposits.

2) Savings deposits : The sole aim of banks in receiving these deposits is to promote the habit of thrift among low income groups. They have the following characteristics :

  1. two or three withdrawls per week are permited
  2. banks pay 4 to 5% interest (nominal) per annum or savings deposits.

3) Recurring deposits: People will deposit their money in these deposits as monthly installments for a fixed period of time. The bank after expiry of the said period will return the total amount with interest thereon. The rate of interest will be higher than the savings deposits.

4) Fixed deposits : Deposits received on fixed accounts are called fixed or time deposits. They are left with the bank for a fixed period. The following are the characteristics.

  1. The amount cannot be withdrawn before the expiry of the fixed period.
  2. Banks pay high rate of interest than any other deposits.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

b) Advancing loans : Commercial banks release funds so collected for productive purposes by way of loans and advances. Commercial bank usually lend money by way of loans, cash credits, overdrafts and by discounting bills of exchange.
1) Cash credit: In this case, the borrower is given a loan. The amount of the loan is deposited in his account in the bank. The loan is not normally paid in cash. The borrower can draw money out of this account as per his needs.

2) Overdraft: It means allowing the depositor to overdraw his account upto a previous agreed limit. Banks allow overdrafts only to those persons who have their accounts in the bank. The overdraft is granted only for short period for customers.

3) Loans : Usually a loan is granted against the securities of assets or the personal security of the borrower bank loans and advances carry a high rate of interest. In addition, banks grant call loans for every short period, term loans for longer period and also grant consumer credit for buying durable goods.

4) Discounting bills of exchange : The banks facilitate trade and commerce by dis-counting the bills of exchange. This is the most popular form of bank lending.

Secondary functions :
a) Agency services : Banks act as agents, correspondents and representatives of their
customer. As an agent a commercial bank collect and pay cheques, drafts, bills and pay insurance premium subscriptions, rent, income tax etc, as per the instruction of their customers, Banks also act as trusties executors and attorneys. .

b) General utility services : Banks provide some general utility services like :

  1. Locker facility the safe custody and valuables.
  2. Issue traveller’s cheques and drafts
  3. Transfer of funds.
  4. Acting a referee to the financial standing of customers
  5. Issue letters of credit
  6. Finance foreign trade by discounts foreign bills of exchange.

Question 5.
Explain the functions of the central bank.
Answer:
Central bank is the apex bank of the banking system of a country. It controls, regulates, monitors all the activities of the banks in the banking system. The following are the functions performed by the central bank.
a) Note issue : In any country central bank alone is authorised to issue the currency notes. It has monopoly power of note issue. It not only issue the currency. It also controls the supply of money in the economy.

b) Banker to government: Central bank renders certain services to the government it acts as a banker, agent and financial advisor to the government. It maintains the accounts of the government funds, receives money and pay money on behalf of the government. It performs all foreign exchange transactions on behalf of the government and maintains the public debt and advises the government on all financial matters.

c) Banker’s bank : Central bank acts as banker’s bank it controls all the transactions of all banks and every bank must maintain a certain minimum cash reserve with central bank.

d) Lender of last resort: It serves as a lender of last resort to all the financial institutions viz. Commercial banks discount houses and other credit institutions. All these institutions approach central bank if they face the problem of liquidation. It also help the banks and other financial institutions by providing loans and advances against certain approved securities and rediscounts the bills on certain terms and conditions.

e) Controller of credit: This is the most important function of central bank. It controls the volume of credit in the economy through various monetary and fiscal policies. It takes some steps to increase or reduce the volume of credit as per the inflationary conditions of the economy. It controls the inflation by reducing the volume of credit and recession by expanding the supply in the economy.

f) Custodian of foreign exchange reserve : Central bank regulates all foreign exchange transactions in a country. It is responsible for exchange rate so it acts against the fluctuations in exchange rates and maintain standard exchange rate.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 6.
Describe the role played by the Reserve Bank of India.
Answer:
The Central Bank of our country is Reserve Bank of India. It was established in April 1935, with a share capital of ₹ 5 crores. It was originally owned by private shareholders but was nationalised by the government of India in 1949. It performs all its activities under the Reserve Bank of India Act 1934.

The main aim of. RBI is to achieve the monetary stability and to control the credit system of an economy. It performs the following functions.
1) Note issue : Reserve Bank of India enjoys the monopoly of note issue in the country. It maintains a minimum ₹ 200 crores of gold and foreign exchange reserves of which gold should be ₹ 115 crores. It issue notes in the denominations of ₹ 1,000, ₹ 500, ₹ 100, ₹ 50, ₹ 20, ₹ 10, ₹ 5 and ₹ 2. One rupee note and coins are issued by the finance department of the Government of India. Reserve Bank of India prints all the currency notes in the security press of the Government of India.

2) Banker to Government : Reserve Bank of India acts as the banker, agent and adviser to the Government of India. It receives money and makes payments on behalf of the government and gives temporary advances to the government. It advises the government in all financial matters.

3) Banker’s Bank : Reserve Bank serves as a banker not only to the government but also to the banks. It provides financial assistance to the commercial banks by giving loans and rediscounting the bills of exchange. It helps the banks by acting as a clearing house for settlement of inter bank transactions and controls the supply of money in the economy through cash reserve ratio.

4) Lender of last resort : It acts as lender of last resort by granting loans and advances to the commercial banks against some securities viz., treasury bonds, treasury bills and other approved securities. It also provides financial help to banks by rediscounting the eligible bills of exchange.

5) Custodian of foreign exchange reserves : Reserve Bank of India as a member of the International Monetary fund. It regulates all foreign exchange transactions in the country. It controls and regulates the purchase and sale of foreign exchange through restrictions on exports and imports to maintain the official rate of exchange.

6) Credit controller : Reserve Bank of India controls the volume of credit in the country. It controls the credit through different methods by appropriate monetary or fiscal policies. It announces credit policy for every six months based on the credit needs of the country. Through this it controls the inflation and deflation.

7) Promotional and development functions: Reserve Bank of India inorder to achieve economic development performs certain promotional and developmental functions.
They are :

  1. Promoting various financial institutions to provide industrial finance.
  2. It takes steps for establishment of banks throughout the country and expansion of their branches.
  3. Encourage the financial institution to provide financial help to agriculture and rural credit.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 7.
Define inflation. Explain the causes of inflation.
Answer:
Inflation means a rise in the general price level over a long period of time. It occur due to the following reasons.

  1. Increase in the aggregate demand of commodities.
  2. Inadequate supply of commodites.
  3. Increase in the cost of production.

I. The factors that the effect the increase in demand.

  1. Heavy pressure of population.
  2. Increase in economy’s money supply.
  3. More public expenditure towards various welfare schemes.
  4. Reduce in rates of direct taxes.
  5. Increase in the income levels of individuals.
  6. Deficit financing by government.
  7. Conspicious spending by the people having black money.
  8. Production in direct tax rates.

II. Factors that increase the cost of production :

  1. Increase in costs of various factors of production.
  2. Increase in tax rates.
  3. Increase in the prices of technology.
  4. Devaluation of domestic currency.
  5. Inefficient management and no control on expenditure.
  6. Lack of optimum allocation of resources.
  7. Devaluation of domestic currency.

III. Factors that cause inadequate supply :

  1. Irregular monsoons, floods, interior seeds in agriculture.
  2. Non-availability of scarcity of inputs and raw materials.
  3. Under-utilisation of productive capacity.
  4. Shortage of investment due to non-availability of institutional credit.
  5. Artificial scarcity due to black-marketing.
  6. Exports at the cost of domestic supply.
  7. Long gestation period of certain industries.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 8.
Discuss the impact of inflation.
Answer:
Inflation refers to a persistent upward movement in the general price level rather than once for all rise in it.
The effects of inflation can be divided into two sub-heads.

  1. Effects of production
  2. Effects of distribution

It will affect all economic activities in the economy.
A) On production :
a) Mild inflation stimulates production and it increases the profit margin of entrepreneurs.
b) High inflation rate hinders production. ;
c) Inflation discourages savings. This affects the capital formation which in turn affects production.

B) On distribution :
Inflation produces a deep impact on the distribution of income and wealth of society. A prolonged period of inflation results in the distribution of wealth in favour of rich and affluent classes of society. The concrete effects of inflation on various groups of society are as follows.

Effects on distribution : Inflation produces a deep impact on the distribution of income and wealth of society. A prolonged period of inflation results in the distribution of wealth in favour of inflation on various groups of society are as follows.
1) Debtors and creditors : During inflation debtors are generally the gainers while the creditors are the losses. The reason is that the debtors had borrowed when the purchasing power of money was high and now return the loans when the purchasing power of money is low due to rising prices.

2) On fixed income groups : Those who get fixed income lose from inflation. Salaried persons people living oh past savings, pensioners, interest earners are the worst suffers during inflation because their income remain fixed.

3) On working class: During inflation working class also suffers worst because wages do not rise as much as the prices of commodities. In addition there is a time lag between the rise in prices and rise in wages. If the trade unions are strong they may get equal increase in money incomes compared to rise in prices.

4) Entrepreneurs : They experience windfall gains as the prices at their stocks suddenly go up. Inflation thus re-distributes income and wealth in such away as to harm the interest of creditors, labours, fixed income groups and favours the businessmen, traders and debtors. By meaning the rich richer and poor poorer, inflation is socially undesirable.

C) Social impact: Economic inequality leads to unequal opportunities in matters of health, education and employment. This results in social injustice.

D) Political effect: Inflation widens social and economic disparities. It leads to for political movements and if government is not responsive. This movement may threaten the stability of governments. .

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State any three definitions of money, which definition do you consider better and why ?
Answer:
Money plays a vital role in modem economy. A modem economy is rightly known as monetary economy because at the crucial position that money occupies. In the olden days goods were exchanged for goods. Such system is called barter system. However when economics grew there was a tremendous increase in the wants of the people as well as in the number of transactions then barter system became more difficult, in order to eliminate the difficulties in the barter system money came into existence.

Definition of money: Several economists have defined money in several ways. Some of the prominent definitions are given below.
According to Waker’ – “Money is what money does”.
According to ‘Robertson’ – Money as” anything which is widely accepted in payment for goods or in discharge of other kinds of business obligations”.
According to ‘Seligman’ – Money as “one that possesses general acceptability”.
According to “Crowther” – Money as “anything that is generally acceptable as a medium of exchange and which at the same time acts as a measure and store of value”.

It may be found from the above definitions that the main focus is on general acceptability. Anything that used as money should have the general acceptance of the public as medium of exchange because it is for direct exchange of commodities money is fundamentally required. It acts as a common measure of value. However its suitability as a store of value is equally important. Therefore we can consider Crowther’s definition as relatively more comprehensive. It is elaborate and covers the most important functions of money.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 2.
Distinguish between different types of money.
Answer:
Money can be grouped into various items based on the value, material used and the legal status. They are :
1) Commodity money and representative money: Money is classified into commodity money and representative money on the basis of the intrinsic value it possess. If the intrinsic value is equal to the face value of coin is called commodity money and if the value is less than the face value is called representative money.

2) Legal tender money and optional money : On the basis of legality money is divided into legal tender money and optional money. If money is accepted as per law by every one is called legal tender money. If the acceptance is optional and not according to law is called optional money.
Ex: Cheques.

3) Metallic money and paper money : Based on the material used money can be divided into metallic and paper money. If money is made up of metals such as silver, nickle, steel etc., all coins are metallic money and if money is printed on papers is called paper money. ^

4) Standard money and token money: If the face value and intrinsic value are same. The money is called standard money and if the face Value is higher than the intrinsic value is called token money.

5) Credit money : It is also called as bank money. This is created by commercial banks. This refers to the bank deposits that are repayable on demand and can be transferred from one person to other through cheques.

Question 3.
Explain the concept of the legal tender money.
Answer:
Based on the legality money is divided into legal tender money and optional money.
Legal tender money is that money which is accepted by the people as per Jaw while paying the amount for goods and services. This is further divided into two types. They are :

  1. Limited legal tender money.
  2. Unlimited legal tender money.

1) Limited legal tender money : The money which no persons can be forced to accept beyond a certain limit. The maximum limit for acceptance will be decided by the government.
Ex : 5 paise, 10 paise, 25 paise. The limit in case of these Coins is 25 rupees.

2) Unlimited legal tender money : This money which everyone should accept without any limit in payment of goods and services.
Ex : 1 rupee paper note, 5 rupee coins, 2 rupee coins, 1 rupee and 50 paise coins.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 4.
State the contingent functions of money.
Answer:
Money plays a vital role in modem economy.
According to Waker’ – “Money is what money does”.
According to ‘Robertson’ – “Anything which is widely accepted in payment for goods discharge of other kinds of business obligations”.
Contingent functions :
a) Measurement and distribution of National income: National income of a country be measured in money by aggregating the value of all commodities. This is not possible in a barter system similarly national income can be distributed to different factors of production by making payment then in money.

b) Money equalises marginal utilises / productivities : The consumers can equalize marginal utilities of different commodities purchased by them with the help of money. We know how consumers equalize the marginal utility of the taste rupee they speed on each commodity Similarly firms can also equalize the marginal productivities of different factors of production and maximize profits.

c) Basis of credit: Credit is created by banks from out of the primary deposits of money supply of credit, in an economy is dependent on the supply of nominal money.

d) Liquidity : Money is the most important liquid asset. Interms of liquidity it is superior other assets. Money is cent percent liquid.

Question 5.
Explain different hinds of deposits accepted by the commercial banks.
Answer:
Commercial banks pay a very important role in the economic growth of a country. Commercial banks are the most important source of institutional credit in the money market. Banks attract savings from the people and encourage investment in industry, trade and commerce. Bank is a profit seeking business firm dealing in money and credit.

The word bank is derived from the “German” word “bankco” which means joint stock or joint fund. Banking in Britain originated with the lending of money by wealthy individuals to merchants who wished to borrow.

According to ‘Richard Sydney’ sayers – “Banks are institutions whose debts .usually referred to as “Bank deposits” are commonly accepted in final settlement of other people’s debts”.
Accepting deposits : The commercial bank just like any other money lender is doing money lending business. Bank receives public money in the form of deposits. The deposits mainly are of the following types.
a) Current deposits : These deposits have two characteristics.

  1. There are no restrictions with regard to the amount of withdrawal and number of withdrawls.
  2. Banks normally do not pay any interest on current account deposits.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

b) Savings deposits : The sole aim of banks in receiving these deposits is to promote the habit of thrift among low income groups. They have the following characteristics :

  1. Two or three withdrawals per week are permitted.
  2. Banks pay 4% to 5% interest per annum on savings deposits.

c) Recurring deposits : People will deposit their money in these deposits as monthly installments for a fixed period of time. The bank after expiry of the said period will return the total amount with interest thereon. The rate of interest will be higher than the saving deposits.

d) Fixed deposits : Deposits are fixed accounts are called fixed or time deposits they are left with the bank for a fixed period. The following are the characteristics.

  1. The amount cannot be withdrawn before expiry of fixed period.
  2. Bank pay high rate of interest than any deposits.

Question 6.
Explain different types of loans and advances paid by the commercial banks.
Answer:
According to “Crowther”- “A bank is a dealer in debts his own and other people”.
Banking means the accepting for the purpose of lending or investment of deposits of money from the public repayable or demand or otherwise and withdrawable by cheque, draft or otherwise.

Advancing loans : Commercial banks refease funds so collected for productive purposes by way of loans and advances. Commercial bank usually lend money by way of loans, cash credit, overdrafts and by discounting bills of exchange. ‘

a) Cash credit: In this case, the borrower is given a loan is deposited in his account in the bank. The loan is not normally paid in cash. The borrower can draw money out of this account as per his needs.

b) Overdraft: It means allowing the depositor to overdraft his account upto a previously agreed limit. Banks allow overdraft only to those persons who have their accounts in the bank. The overdraft is granted only for a short period for customers.

c) Loans : Usually a loan is granted against the securities of assets or personal security of the borrowed bank loans and advances carry a high rate of interest. In addition, banks grant call loans for every short period: Term loans for longer period and also grant consumer credit for buying durable goods.

d) Discounting bills of exchange : The bank facilitates ‘trade and commerce’ by ‘ discounting the bills of exchange. This is the most popular form of bank lending.

Question 7.
Distinguish between the roles of a commercial bank and a central bank with reference to credit.
Answer:
Controlling credit is the most important function of the central bank. It controls the volume of credit in the economy through various monetary and fiscal policies. It takes . some qualitative and quantitative step to increase or reduce the volume of credit as per the conditions of the economy.

It controls the inflation by reducing the volume of credit and controls recession by expanding the supply of credit in the economy.

Commercial bank also provide credit facilities in the form of loans and .advances. Commercial banks release funds so collected for productive purposes by way of loans and advances. Commercial bank usually lend money by way of loans, cash credits, overdrafts and by discounting bills of exchange.
a) Cash credit: In this case, the borrower is given a loan. The amount of the loan is deposited in his account in the bank. The loan is not normally paid in cash. The borrower can draw money out of his account as per his needs.

b) Overdraft: It means allowing the depositor to overdraft his account upto a previously agreed limit. Bank allow overdraft only to those persons who have their accounts in the bank. The overdraft is granted only for short period for customers.

c) Loans : Usually a loan is granted against the securities of assets or the personal security of the borrower bank loans and advances carry a high rate of interest. In addition, bank grant call loans for every short period. Term loans for a longer period and also grant consumer credit for buying durable goods.

d) Discounting bills of exchange : The bank facilitates trade and commerce by discounting th,e bills of exchange. This is the most popular form of bank lending.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 8.
Explain why the central bank is called banker’s bank ?
Answer:
The central bank acts as a banker’s bank because of the following functions.
a) Every bank maintained a certain minimum of cash reserves with the central bank as a statutory obligation. The ratio of cash reserve to the deposits of the commercial banks will be prescribed by the central bank.

b) It serves as a lender of last resort and provides financial assistance to the scheduled bank by rediscounting the eligible bills of exchanges and provides loans and advances, against approved securities. This helps the commercial banks to over come the problems of liquidity.

c) It acts as cleaning house for The commercial banks to settle their inter bank accounts. Each and every commercial banks to maintains accounts with the central bank. Because of this central bank transfer funds from one bank to another bank very easily.

Question 9.
What do you understand by lender of last resort’ ?
Answer:
The central bank serves as a lender of last resort to all the financial institutions i.e., commercial banks, discount houses and other credit institutions. These institutions can also approach the central bank when they face the problem of liquidity. The central bank helps the commercial banks by providing loans and advances against some approved securities and also help to rediscount the commercial banks bills subject to certain terms and conditions.

Question 10.
State the objectives of a central bank. [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
Central bank is the apex bank of the baning system in a country. It controls, regulates and supervises the activities of the banks in the banking system of a country. The following are the objectives of the central bank.

  1. Maintaining the internal value of currency.
  2. Preserve the external value of currency.
  3. Ensure price stability.
  4. Promote economic development.
  5. Develop financial institutions.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 11.
Write a note on the Reserve Bank of India. [March 18, 16]
Answer:
Reserve Bank of India is the central bank of India. It was established in April 1935, with a share capital of ₹ 5 crores. It was originally owned by private shareholders and was nationalised by the government of India in 1949. It performs all the functions of central bank according to the “Reserve Bank of India Act 1934”. .
The main objectives of Reserve Bank of India are :

  1. Regulating the issue of currency notes.
  2. Providing guidance to the commercial banks.
  3. Controlling the credit system of the economy
  4. Achieving the monetary stability in the economy.
  5. Implementing the uniform credit policy throughout the country.

Question 12.
Explain any three definitions of inflation.
Answer:
Inflation we mean a general rise in the prices in the ordinary language it is rapid upward movement of prices in a broader sense. The term inflation refers to persistent rise in the general price level over a long period of time.
According to Prof.Hawtrey “Issue of too much currency”
According to ’Dalton’: Defined inflation as “Too much Money is chasing too few goods”.
According to ‘Pigou’: “Inflation exists when money income is expanding more than in proportion to increase in earning activity”.
According to Irving Fisher : “Inflation occurs when the volume of money increases faster than the available supply of goods”.
According to Samuelson : “Inflation denotes a rise in the general level of prices”.

Question 13.
Distinguish between demand – pull and cost – push inflation.
Answer:
It refers to a persistent upward movement in the “general price level rather than once for all rise in it. If results in a decline of the purchasing power. There is no generally accepted definition to inflation.

According to “Hawtrey” is “issue of too much currency”.

According to “Dalton” as “too much money chasing too few goods”.

Demand – pull inflation : The most common cause of inflation is pressure of even increasing aggregate demand for goods and services compared to the rise of aggregate supply. If aggregate demand for goods and services exceeds aggregate supply of goods and services prices rise. This is called “demand – pull inflation”.

Cost – push inflation : As the result of rise in the cost of production of goods and services, prices. This is. called cost – push inflation. It is caused by increase in wage enforced by trade unions through strikes or increase in other factor costs.

On this two types of inflations – cost – push inflation is much more difficult to control than demand – pull inflation the reason is obvious. Any attempt to cutdown wages by the authorities will be met by stiff resistance on the part of the workers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 14.
State the types of inflation. [March 17]
Answer:
Inflation means a general rise in prices. Based on the rate of inflation, it may be divided into four types.

  1. Creeping inflation : When rise in the prices is very slow and small, it is called creeping inflation.
  2. Walking inflation : This is the second stage of inflation. The inflation rate will be between 2% and 4%.
  3. Running inflation : When the rate of inflation is in the range of 4-10% per annum, it is called running inflation.
  4. Galloping inflation or hyper inflation : If the inflation rate exceeds 10%, gallop-ing inflation occurs. It may also called hyper inflation.

Question 15.
Explain the effects of inflation on distribution.
Answer:
Effects of inflation : A period of prolonged persistent and continuous inflation affects everyone in the economy it effects production and distribution. Income and employment etc., it is goods so long as it is under control of the economy.The effects of inflation can be discussed under two sub-heads.

  1. Effects on production
  2. Effects on distribution

Effects on distribution : Inflation produces a deep impact on the distribution of income and wealth of society. A prolonged period of inflation results in the distribution of wealth in favour of inflation on various groups of society are as follows.
1) Debtors and creditors : During inflation debtors are generally the gainers while the creditors are the losses. The reason is that the debtors had borrowed when the purchasing power of money was high and now return the loans when the purchasing power of money is low due to rising prices.

2) On fixed income groups : Those who get fixed income lose from inflation. Salaried persons people living on past savings, pensioners, interest earners are the worst suffers during inflation because their income remain fixed.

3) On working class: During inflation working class also suffers worst because wages do not rise as much as the prices of commodities. In addition there is a time lag between the rise in prices and rise in wages. If the trade unions are strong they may get equal increase in money incomes compared to rise in prices.

4) Entrepreneurs : They experience windfall gains as the prices at their stocks suddenly go up. Inflation thus re-distributes income and wealth in such away as to harm the interest of creditors, labours, fixed income groups and favours the businessmen traders and debtors. By meaning the rich richer and poor poorer, inflation is socially undesirable.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 16.
Enumerate the measures for control of inflation. [March 18, 16]
Answer:
To control the inflation the government has taken various steps. They are :

  1. Increase the production in the long run.
  2. Implementing proper monetary and fiscal policies to reduce the supply of money • and credit.
  3. Controlling prices and eliminating black markets.
  4. Importing the goods which are scares in supply from outside countries.
  5. Introducing rationing and quota system in case of mass consumption of goods.
  6. Distribution of goods to all the needy sections of the people.

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Double coincidence of wants
Answer:
Under Barter system a buyer should be able to find a seller who is not only requires the same commodity but should possess the commodity required by the buyer the want of both the buyer and the seller must coincide. This is called coincidence of wants.

Question 2.
Standard of deferred payments
Answer:
Money serves as a measure of deferred payments. Deferred payments refers to future payments. As such money is helpful not only in current transaction but also in conducting future transaction thus money acts as a bridge from present to the future, i.e., an efficient store of value.

Question 3.
Store of value
Answer:
Money acts par excellence as a store of value money preserves and carries values through time and place it is convenient to store money rather than goods. Money does not come down in value by being stored up like commodities.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 4.
Liquidity [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
Liquidity means the ease with which one can convert a financial asset into a medium of exchange. Liquidity is greatest for money as an asset because money itself is a medium of exchange. In fact money is the only asset which possess perfect liquidity.

Question 5.
Currency
Answer:
Currency consists of paper notes and coins. Paper notes are. issued by government or the central bank of a country. In India, the Reserve Bank which is the central bank of India issue currency notes at all denominations. Except one rupee notes. The government of India issues them coins are metallic tokens and are produced in the limits of government.

Question 6.
Near money
Answer:
The near money refers to those highly liquid assets which are not accepted as money but then can be easily converted into money within a short period.
Ex : Saving bank deposit, shares, treasury bills, bonds etc.

Question 7.
Credit money
Answer:
This is also called bank money. This is created by commercial banks. This is refers to the bank deposits that are repayable on demand and which can be transferred from one individual to the other through cheques.

Question 8.
Limited legal tender
Answer:
Money which no person can be forced to accept beyond certain limit. The maximum limit for acceptance is decided by the government. In India small coins 5 paise, 10 paise, 25 paise are limited legal tender the maximum limit of ₹ 25.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 9.
Token money
Answer:
It is the money or unit of currency whose face value is higher than the intrinsic value. It is not convertible it facilitates transactions and accepted by the public as medium of exchange.

Question 10.
Time deposits
Answer:
Time deposits are deposits that are not payable on demand. They are repayable only after their maturity period. These deposits are called term deposits. They are two types, i) Fixed deposits ii) Recurring deposits.

Question 11.
Recurring deposits
Answer:
These are called fixed deposits but the deposits money is paid not in lumpsum. But every month for various periods from 12 to 120 months.

Question 12.
Demand deposits
Answer:
The deposits which are payable on demand without any prior notice demand deposits they can be transferred from one person to person. All current deposits are demand deposits.

Question 13.
Cash credit
Answer:
Bank give cash credit to business form and industries against current assets. Such as shares, bonds, etc., cash credit is an open credit.

Question 14.
Overdraft [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
Overdraft is allowed on current account only the current account holders are given the facility overdraft by which they are allowed to draw an amount above their balances.

Question 15.
Discounting of bills of exchange
Answer:
Bills of exchange are the written undertaking received by the seller from the buyer against the credit transaction. The person one who possesses bill can discount the bill in the bank. If they need money.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 16.
Creation of credit [March 18]
Answer:
It means the process of creating credit from the depositor received by the bank from the customers to those who is in need of money in the form of loans and advances.

Question 17.
Clearance house
Answer:
Central Bank acts as a clearing house for the commercial banks to settle their interbank accounts all commercial banks maintain their accounts with the central bank.

Question 18.
Lender of last resort
Answer:
The central bank serves as lender of last resort not only to commercial banks but also other credit institutions they approach central bank when they face the problem of liquidity and rediscounting the bills and taking loans.

Question 19.
Reserve money
Answer:
The amount kept by the banks in the bank to use in the future to face the unfore seen events these reserves will be used by banks to lend loans and reduce the losses in the future.

Question 20.
Reserve Bank of India
Answer:
Reserve Bank of India is the Central Bank of India. It was established in April 1935 with a share capital of ₹ 5 crore. It was nationalised by government of India in 1949 it acts under the Reserve Bank of India 1934.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 21.
Meaning of inflation
Answer:
The term inflation refers to persistent rise in the general price level over a long period of time. Money supply increase, money value will be fallen, result in purchasing power will be decline.

Question 22.
Consumer Price Index (CPI)
Answer:
This is the index of prices of a given basket of commodities which are brought by the representative consumer. CPI is expressed in percentage terms.

Question 23.
Wholesale Price Index (WPI)
Answer:
Whole sale price is that price at which goods are traded in bulk. The index for wholesale price is called Wholesale Price Index (WPI).

Question 24.
Demand – Pull inflation
Answer:
Inflation caused by the increase in the aggregate demand for commodities over aggregate supply is called demand – pull inflation. Aggregate demand increases due to increase in the income level of the people.

Question 25.
Cost-push inflation
Answer:
Inflation caused by the rise in cost of production is called cost – push inflation. Cost of production may rise due to the increase in wages forced by the trade unions of government.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 9 Money, Banking and Inflation

Question 26.
Hyper inflation [March 16]
Answer:
Hyper inflation is also known as galloping inflation. If the inflation rate exceeds 10% per annum is called hyper inflation.

Question 27.
Inflation and value of money.
Answer:
Inflation and value of money are important aspects of macro economics. They play a major role in the functioning of the economy and bear large influence on all economic activities affecting the levels of output, income, employment etc.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 8th Lesson Macro Economic Aspects Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 8th Lesson Macro Economic Aspects

Essay Questions

Question 1.
Discuss the implications of the classical theory of employment
Answer:
The theory of output and employment developed by economists such as Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Malthus is known as classical theory. lt is based on the famous “Law of markets” advocated by J.B. Say. According to this law “supply creates its own demand”. The classical theory of employment assumes that there is always full employment of labour and other resources. The classical economists ruled out any general unemployment in the long run. These views are known as the classical theory of output and employment.
The classical theory of employment can be three dimensions.
A. Goods market equilibrium → Say’s market law
B. Money market equilibrium → Say’s market law
C. Equilibrium of the labour market (Pigou wage cut policy)

A) Goods market equilibrium: The 1st part of Say’s law of markets explains the goods market equilibrium. According to Say “supply creates its own demand”. Say’s law states that supply always equals demand. Whenever additional output is produced in the economy, the factors of production which participate in the process of production. The total income generated is equivalent to the total value of the output produced. Such income creates additional demand for the sale of the additional output. Thus there could be no deficiency in the aggregate demand in the economy for the total output. Here every thing is automatically adjusting without need of government intervention.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

The classical economists believe that economy attains equilibrium in the long run at the level of full employment. Any disequilibrium between aggregate demand and aggregate supply equilibrium adjusted automatically. This changes in the general price level is known as price flexibility.

B) Money market equilibrium : The goods market equilibrium leads to bring equilibrium of both money and labour markets. In goods market, it is assumed that total income spent the classical economists agree that part of the income may be saved. But the savings is gradually spent on capital goods. The expenditure on capital goods is called investment. It is assumed that equality between savings and investment is brought by the flexible rate of interest. This can be explained by the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects 1
In the diagram savings and investment are measured on the ‘X’ axis and rate of interest on Y axis. Savings and investments are equal at ‘Oi’ rate of interest. So money market equilibrium can be automatically brought through the rate of interest flexibility.

C) Labour market equilibrium : According to the classical economists, unemployment may occur in the short run. This is not because the demand is not sufficient but due to increase in the wages forced by the trade unions. A.C. Pigou suggests that reduction in the wages will remove,unemployment. This is called wage – cut policy. A reduction in the wage rate results in the increase in employment.

According to the classical theory supply of and demand for labour are determined by real wage rate. Demand for labour is the inverse function of the real wage rate. The supply of labour is the direct function of real wage rate. At a particular point real wage rate the supply of and the demand for labour in the economy become equal and thus equilibrium attained in the labour market. Thus there is full employment of labour. This can be ex-plained with the help of diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects 2
In the above diagram supply of and demand for labour is measured on the X – axis. The real wage rate is measured on the Y axis. If the wage rate is OW1, the supply of labour more than the demand for labour. Hence the wage rate falls. If the real wage rate is OW2, the demand for labour is more than supply of labour. Hence the wage rate rises. At OW, real wage rate the supply and demand are equal. This is equilibrium.
Assumptions:

  1. There is no interference of government of the economy.
  2. Perfect competition in commodity and labour market.
  3. Full employment.
  4. Wage flexibility.
  5. Money does not matter.
  6. Savings and investment depends on the rate of interest.
  7. Supply of and demand for labour depends on real wage rate.

Question 2.
Explain the Keynesian theory of employment. [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
Keynes theory of employment is the principle of effective demand. He called his theory, general theory because it deals with all levels of employment. Keynes explains that lack of aggregate demand is the cause of unemployment. He used the terms aggregate demand, aggregate supply. It means total. The term effective demand is used to denote that level of aggregate demand which is equal to aggrerate supply.

According to Keynes where, aggregate demand and aggregate supply are intersected at that point effective demand is determined. This effective demand will determine the level of employment.

Aggregate supply schedule : The aggregate supply schedule shows the various amounts of the commodity that will be offered for sale at a series of price. As the level of output increases with the level of employment. The aggregate supply price also increases with every increase in the level of employment. The aggregate supply curve slopes upwards from left to right. But when the economy reaches the level of the full employment, the aggregate supply curve becomes vertical.

Aggregate demand schedule: The various aggregate demand prices at different level of employment is called aggregate demand price schedule. As the level of employment rises, the total income of the community also rises and therefore the aggregate demand price also increases. The aggregate demand curve slopes upward from left to right.

Equilibrium level of income : The two determinants of effective demand aggregate supply and aggregate demand prices combined schedule is shown in the following table.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects 3
The table shows that so long as the demand price is higher than the aggregate supply price. The level of employment 40 lakh workers aggregate demand price is equal to aggregate supply price i.e., 300 crores. So effective demand in the above table is ₹ 300 crores. This can be shown in the following diagrams.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects 4
In the diagram X’ axis represents the employment and Y axis represents price. A.S is aggregate supply curve A.D is aggregate demand curve. The point of intersection between the two ‘E1‘ point. This is effective demand where all workers are employed at this point the entrepreneur’s expectation of profits are maximised. At any other points the entrepreneurs will either incur losses or earn sub-normal profits.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 3.
How does Keynes advocate government expenditure to reduce unemployment ? Explain.
Answer:
The role of the state has become almost all pervasive in the economic organisation of the country. Whether it may be developed or underdeveloped country.
The activities undertaken by the modem State in the economic organisation of a country may be discussed under the following heads.

1) The State and Industry: The activities of the State in the industrial sphere may be considered under three groups namely, the regulatory functions, control of monopolies and lastly nationalisation or public ownership.

The state is taking an increasing role in regulating the manner of forming and operating industrial undertakings. The undertakings will probably have to take out licenses from the government before they can start operation. To check the growth of few giant concerns, the state has been forced to adopt measures for fixing prices and other terms of sale of the monopolised products. All the methods of controlling monopolies have ineffective, then the State take over the ownership of the monopolistic concerns.

2) State and Labour : The modem state has also been forced to take a number of steps for protecting the interests of labour. In this respect the state has passed factory laws prohibiting the employment of children and women under certain circumstances, fixing of reasonable hours of work etc.

3) The State and the Social Services : State has adopted schemes of social insurance according tp which all persons get free medical treatment and cash payments during periods of sickness, receive unemployment benefits if they are out of work, enjoy pensions in their oldage or in case of disablement. The widows and orphans also receive pensions from the State. The purpose behind these schemes is to relieve the poverty of the citizens and to provide security against the various risks of life.

4) The State and Foreign Trade : The state interferes with the course of foreign trade for the protection of home industries and for curing deficits in the balance of payments. The deficits in balance of payments will be cured by the State through the system of import control and exchange restrictions.

5) State and Inequalities of Income : It is the duty of the state to take all reasonable steps for the reduction of inequalities of income. Therefore, the state has adopting the system of progressive taxation of incomes, imposing levy of death duties or inherited proper ties at progressive rates and distributing the proceeds of the taxes among the poorer sections of the community.

6) The State and War : The expenses of modem war have forced the state to assume a good deal of control over the economic lifd of a country. If the economic system is to be organised fully for the successful prosecution of the war, it may be necessary for the state to exercise an all – round control over the economy of the country.

7) The State and the Trade Cycles : Both monetary policy and budgetary policy can be utilised by the State to check the course of the trade cycle.

8) The State and Economic Planning : An economic plan is a method of organising and utilising .the available resources of a country for the purpose of fulfilling certain desirable end. The modem state is expected to formulate such an economic plan or plans. It is necessary or desirable for the state to formulate a plan for rapid economic development especially in underdeveloped economies, to secure a better distribution of the national income among all classes of people, for the development of resources of the community so on to ensure full employment for everybody etc. All these activities of the state will increase the public expenditure.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 4.
Discuss how the Keynesian theory is an improvement over the classical theory of employment ?
Answer:
Classical theory of employment was stated by Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Robert Malthus etc. It is based on the Say’s law of market. According to this law “Supply creates its own demand”. The classical theory of employment assumed that there is always full employment of labour and other resources.

Infact full – employment is considered to be the normal situation and any lapses from full employment are considered to be abnormal. Even if at any time there is not actual full employment. The classical theory asserts that there is always a tendency towards full employment.

The free play of economic resources itself bring about the fuller utilization of economic resources including labour. Any interference of government in economic activities shall fail to bring about full employment.

Criticism on classical theory: J. M Keynes criticized the basic assumptions of classical theory. According to him the assumptions of classical theory are far from reality.
1) Full employment: According to classicals full employment is a general condition in the economy but for Keynes full employment is a special situation and not a general situation. The 1930’s economic depression proved that the classical assumption of full employment equilibrium was wrong.

2) Automatic adjustment: Classicals believed that the economic forces automatically adjust by them self without interference of the government. But automatic adjustment mecha-nism faild to restore. Full employment during the period of economic depression.

3) Money is neutral: J.M Keynes denounced the classical assumption that money is neutral. He integrated monetary variables with real variable through rate of interest and successfully demonstrated the effect of changes in money supply on real variables.

4) Wage-cut-policy : Classicals suggested the wage cut policy to solve the problem of involuntary unemployment. But according to Keynes it is impossible to cut money wage. The unions always fight for a hike in money wage and never accept a cut in money wage.

5) Savings and investment: According to classicals the saving and investment are the function of interest rate. But Keynes argued that savings is a function of level of income rather than that the rate of interest.

6) Labour supply: The supply of labour depends upon the money wage rate and not on real wage rate because workers suffer from money illusion i.e., they are interested in the amount of money they receive rather than its purchasing power.-

7) Long run analysis : Keynes also criticized the long run analysis of classical by saying that we are all dead in the long run. He emphasised the need for the analysis of short run problems and providing solution for them.

8) According to Keynes existence of perfect competition is also wrong.
Having made such a frontal attract on the classical theory. Keynes offered his own theory in its place. So his theory is treated as an improvement over the classical theory of employment.

Question 5.
Explain the concept of under – employment equilibrium with the help of a diagram.
Answer:
Under employment equilibrium is a situation when all resources are not fully used and same resources are lying idle or under utilised.
In case of under employment, equilibrium increase in aggregate demand brought about by expansionary fiscal and monetary policies will lead to increase in aggregate supply.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects 5
Keynesian employment theory states that in general there is unemployment in the economy in the short run that is caused by deficiency of aggregate demand. This can be shown in the side diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects 6
Output is shown on X-axis as national income on the Y- axis consumption expenditure (Q and investment I are measured. AS is the aggregate supply curve. E represents the equilibrium point. ON output represents low level employment and to ensure full employment. The output should reach ON1 level. The aggregate demand helps determine output in the Keynesian approach. AS is upward sloping curve. AD and AS intersects at point A. It implies that a modem market economy can get trapped in an under employment equilibrium. Thus Keynes’s analysis created a revolution in macro economics.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 6.
Describe the various methods of redemption of public debt.
Answer:
Redemption of public debt means repayment of public debt. All government debts should be rapid promptly. There are various methods of repayment which may be discussed under the following heads.

  1. Surplus budget: Surplus budget means having public revenue in excess of public expenditure. If the government plans for a surplus budget, the excess revenue may be utilized to repay public debt.
  2. Refunding : Refunding implies the issue of fresh bands and securities by government so that the matured loans can be used for repayment of public debt.
  3. Annuities : By this method, the government repays past of the public debt every year. Such annual payments are made regularly till the debt is completely cleared.
  4. Sinking fund: By this method, the government creates a separate fund called ’Sinking fund’ for the purpose of repaying public debt. This is considered as the best method of redemption.
  5. Conversion: Conversion means that the existing loans are changed into new loans before the date of their maturity.
  6. Additional taxation : Government may resort to additional taxation so as to raise necessary funds to repay public debt under this method new taxes are imposed.
  7. Capital levy: Capital levy is a heavy one time tax on the capital assets and estates.
  8. Surplus Balance of payments : This is useful to repay external debt for which foreign exchange is required surplus balance of payment implies exports in excess of imports by which reserves of foreign exchange can be created.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
“Supply creates its own demand” comment on the statement. [March 18, 17]
Answer:
Classical theory of employment or the theory of output and employment developed by economists such as Adam Smith, David Ricardo, Robert Malthus etc., it is based on the J.B Say’s law of market’. According to this law “supply creates its own demand”. The classical theory of employment assumes that there is always full employment of labour and other resources.

According to this law the supply always equals to demand it can be expressed as S = D. Whenever additional output is produced in the economy. The factors of production which participate in the process of production. Earn income in the form of rent, wages, interest and profits.

The total income so generated is equivalent to the total value of the additional output produced. Such income creates addition demand necessary for the sale of the additional output. Therefore the question of addition output not being sold does not arise.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 2.
Enumerate the assumptions of Classical theory of employment.
Answer:
The classical theory of employment is based on the Say’s law of markets. The famous law of markets, propounded by the J.B Say states that “Supply creates its own demand”.
Assumptions : The Say’s law is based on the following assumptions.

  1. There is a free enterprise economy.
  2. There is perfect competition in the economy.
  3. There is no government interference in the functioning of the economy.
  4. The equilibrium process is considered from the long term point of view.
  5. All savings are automatically invested.
  6. The interest rate is flexible.
  7. The wage rate is flexible.
  8. There are no limits to the expansion of the market.
  9. Money acts as medium of exchange.

Question 3.
Explain the criticism against the classical theory of employment.
Answer:
The classical theory of employment came in for severe criticism from J.M. Keynes. The main points of criticism are as follows :

  1. The assumption of full employment is unrealistic. It is rare phenomenon and not a normal features.
  2. The wage cut policy is not a practical policy in modem times. The supply of labour is a function of money wage and not real wage. Trade unions would never accept any reduction in the money wage rate.
  3. Equilibrium between savings and investment is not brought about by a flexible rate of interest. Infact, saving is a function of income and not interest.
  4. The process of equilibrium between supply and demand is not realistic. Keynes commented the self adjusting mechanism doesn’t always operate.
  5. Long run approach to the problem of unemployment is also not realistic. Keynes commented, “we are all dead in the long run”. He considered unemployment as a short- run problem and offered immediate solution through his employment theory.
  6. It is not correct to say that money is neutral. Money acts not only as a medium of exchange but also as a store of value. Money influences variables like consumption, investment and output.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 4.
Explain the wage cut policy.
Answer:
Wage cut policy is one of the assumption of classical theory of employment which was started by “AC Pigou” who defended the classical theory and its full employment assumption. To Pigou and others the wage fund is given. The wage rate determined by dividing the wage fund with the number of workers. Pigou advocated a general cut in money wages in times of depression to restore full employment.

If there is a problem of unemployment in the economy. It is possible to solve this problem by reducing the money wages of the workers. This is known as “wage cut policy”. The given wage fund can offer more employment at a lower wage rate. The classicals believe that involuntary unemployment all involuntary unemployment would disappear.

According to classical theory of the labour supply and its demand depends on real wage rate. Real wage rate indicates the purchasing power of labourers. Because of existence of perfect competition in labour market real wage rate always equals to marginal productivity of labour. Labour supply is positively related to real wage rate and the demand for labour is inversely related to real Wage rate.

Question 5.
Distinguish between aggregate supply price and aggregate demand price.
Answer:
Aggregate supply price : When an entrepreneur gives employment to certain amount of labour. It requires the use of other factors of production or inputs. All these inputs have to be paid remunerations. When all these are added what we get is the value of the output produced or the expenditure incurred to supply employment for a specific number of labourers. By selling the output the entrepreneurs must expect to receive atleast what they have spent. This is known as the “Aggregate supply price” of the output or level of employment. As the level of output increases with the level of employment, aggregate supply price also increases with every increase in the level of employment.

Aggregate demand price : In Keynes theory the aggregate demand determines the level of employment. The aggregate demand price for a given output is the amount of money which the firms expect to receive from the sale of that output. Then aggregate demand will be equal to the sum of consumption (C) investment (I) and Government expenditure (G) for goods and services.
Therefore, Aggregate demand (AD) = C + I + G.
As the level of employment rises, the total income of the community also rises and therefore the aggregate demand, price also increases.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 6.
Explain the concept of effective demand.
Answer:
Effective demand means where aggregate demand equals the aggregate supply. When aggregate demand is equal to aggregate supply the economy is in equilibrium. This can be shown in the table.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects 7
In the table when the level of employment is 14 lakh workers, aggregate demand price is equal to aggregate supply price i.e ₹ 700 crores. This can be shown in the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects 8
In the above diagram aggregate demand price curve (AD) and the aggregate supply price curve (AS) interest each other at point E1. It shows the equilibrium point. The equilibrium has been attained at ON1 level of employment. It is assumed that ON1 in the above diagram does not indicate full employment as the economy is having idle factors of production. So it is considered as under-employment equilibrium.

According to Keynes, to achieve full employment an upward shift of aggregate demand curve is required. This can be possible through government expenditure on goods and services supplied in the economy, whenever private entrepreneurs may not show interest to invest. With this the AD1 curve (C + I) shift as AD2 (C + I + G) at new point of effective demand E2, where the economy reaches full employment level i.e., ONE

Question 7.
What are the sources of public Revenue. [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
Revenue received by the government from different sources is called public revenue.
Public revenue is classified into two kinds.

  1. Tax revenue
  2. Non-Tax revenue.

1) Tax Revenue : Revenue received through collection of taxes from the public is called tax revenue. Both the state and central government collect taxes as per their allocation in the constitution.
Taxes are two types.
a) Direct taxes:

  1. Taxes on income and expenditure. Ex : Income tax, Corporate tax etc.
  2. Taxes on property and capital assests. Ex : Wealth tax, Gift tax etc.

b) Indirect taxes : Taxes levied on goods and services. Ex : Excise duty, Service tax.

2) Non – tax revenue: Government receives revenue from sources other than taxes and such revenue is called non-tax revenue. They are
a) Administrative revenue : Government receives money for certain administrative services. Ex : License fee, Tution fee etc.

b) Commercial revenue : Modern governments establish public sector units to manufacture certain goods and offer certain services. The goods and services are exchanged for the price. So such units earn revenue by way of selling their products. Ex : Indian Oil Corporation, Bharath Sanchar Nigam Ltd, Bharath Heavy Electricals, Indian Railways, State Road Transport Corporations, Indian Air lines etc.,

c) Loans and advances : When the revenue received by the government from taxes and from the above non-tax sources is not sufficient to meet the needs of government expenditure, it may receive loans from the financial institutions operating within the country and also from the public. Modem government also taken loans from international financial institutions.

d) Grants-in-aid : Grants are amount received without any condition of repayment. They are not repaid.
These are two types.

  1. General grant,
  2. Specific grant.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 8.
List out various items of public expenditure. [March 16]
Answer:
Public expenditure is an important constituent of public finance. Modem governments spend money from various welfare activities. The expenditure incurred by the government on various economic activities is called public expenditure.
Governments incur expenditure on the following heads of accounts.

  1. Defence
  2. Internal security
  3. Economic services
  4. Social services
  5. Other general services
  6. Pensions
  7. Subsidies
  8. Grants to state governments
  9. Grants to foreign governments
  10. Loans to state governments
  11. Loans to public enterprises
  12. Loans to foreign governments
  13. Repayment of loans
  14. Assistance to states on natural calamities etc.

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Classical economics.
Answer:
The term classical economics refers to the body of economic group which held their influence from the letter half of the 18th century to the early part of the 20th century. The most important principle of classicism are personal liberty Private property and freedom of private enterprise.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 2.
Laissezf aire
Answer:
According to classicals the role of government in economic activities should be nominal or very less. The free play of economic forces it self bring about the fuller utilization of economic resources including labour. Any interference with the free play of market forces under such circumstances the state shall not interfere in economic matter. It should pursue a policy of laissez fair-a policy of, non-intervention in economic matters.

Question 3.
Say’s law of market [March 16]
Answer:
J.B Say a french economist advocated the famous ‘Law of markets’ on which the classical theory of employment is based. According to this law “supply creates its own demand”. According to this law whenever additional output is created. The factors of production which participate in that production receive incomes equal to that value of that output. This income would be spent either on consumption goods or on capital goods. Thus additional demand is created matching the additional supply.

Question 4.
Market mechanism
Answer:
Market mechanism is the method of solving the central problems of an economy viz., what to produce, how to produce, whom to produce use through the forces of demand and supply. This mechanisms used by a free enterprise capitalist economy.

Question 5.
Full employment [March 17]
Answer:
Full employment is a situation in which all those who are willing to work at the existing wage rate are engaged in work.

Question 6.
Aggregate demand function
Answer:
The schedule showing aggregate demand prices at different levels of employment in the economy is called as aggregate demand function.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 7.
Aggregate supply function
Answer:
The schedule showing the aggregate supply price at different levels of employment is called the aggregate supply function.

Question 8.
Effective demand [March 16]
Answer:
Effective demand is that aggregate demand which becomes equal to the aggregate supply. This refers to the aggregate demand at equilibrium.

Question 9.
Difference between revenue account and capital account
Answer:
Revenue account consists of the current transactions and includes value of transactions relating to export import travel expenses, insurance, investment, income etc. The capital account refers to the transactions of capital nature such as borrowing and lending of capital repayment of capital sale and purchase of shares and securities etc.

Question 10.
Difference between internal debt and external debt
Answer:
Internal debt is the debt which is borrowed by a government from the people and institutions with in the country is called internal debt.
External debt is amount borrowed by a government from institutions and government of other countries is called external debt.

Question 11.
Structure of budget
Answer:
Budget is the annual statement showing the estimated receipts and expenditure of the government for a financial year in the budget. The budget estimates and revised estimates of the current financial year and actual expenditure of the preceding financial year are shown.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 12.
Deficit budget [March 18]
Answer:
Deficit budget arises when the total expenditure in the budget exceeds the total receipts in the budget technically there are four types of deficit budgets.

  1. Revenue deficit
  2. Budget deficit
  3. Fiscal defict
  4. Primary defict

Question 13.
Fiscal deficit
Answer:
Fiscal deficit is the difference between total revenue and total expenditure plus the market borrowings.
Fiscal deficit = (Total revenue – total expenditure) + Other borrowing and other liabilities.

Question 14.
Primary deficit
Answer:
Primary deficit is the fiscal deficit minus the interest payments.

Additional Questions

Question 15.
Wage – cut policy
Answer:
This is the policy advocated by A.C Pigou to reduce unemployment in the economy. It suggests that the wages of the labour should be reduced so that the unemployed can be employed.

Question 16.
Vote on account
Answer:
Vote on account is an interium budget presented for a few months pending presentation of the regular budget.

Question 17.
Surplus budget
Answer:
It refers to the budget in which the total receipts exceed the total expenditure.

Question 18.
Balanced Budget
Answer:
It is the budget in which the total receipts and total expenditure are equal.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 8 Macro Economic Aspects

Question 19.
Revenue deficit
Answer:
Revenue deficit is the difference between the revenue receipts and the revenue ex-penditure.

Question 20.
Redemption of debt
Answer:
Redemption of public debt means repayment of public debt.

Question 21.
Budget.
Answer:
Budget is the annual statement of the estimated receipts and estimated expenditure of the government for the ensuing financial year.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 7 National Income

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 7th Lesson National Income Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 7th Lesson National Income

Essay Questions

Question 1.
Define National Income and explain the various concepts of National Income.
Answer:
National Income means the aggregate value of all the final goods and services produced in the economy in one year.
Concepts of National Income :
1) Gross National Product (GNP) : It is the total value of all final goods and services produced in the economy in one year.
The main components of GNP are :
a) The goods and services purchased by consumers – C.
b) Investments made by public and private sectors – I.
c) Government expenditure on public utility services – G.
d) Incomes earned through International Trade (x – m).
e) Net factor incomes from abroad.
GNP at market prices = C + I – G + (x – m) + Net factor income from abroad.

2) Gross Domestic Product (GDP) : The market value of the total goods and services produced in a country in one particular period usually in a year is the GDP
GDP = C + I + G

3) Net National Product (NNP) : Firms use continuously machines and tools for the production of goods and services. This result in a loss of value due to wear and tear of fixed capital. The loss suffered by fixed capital is called depreciation. When we substract depreciation from GNP we get NNP
NNP = GNP – depreciation.

4) National Income at factor cost: The cost of production of a good is equal to the rewards paid to the factors which participated in the production process. So the cost of production of a firm is the rent paid land, wages paid labour, interest paid on capital and profits of the entrepreneur.
National Income at factor cost = NNP + Subsidies – Indirect Taxes – Profits of Govt, owned firms.

5) Personal Income: It is the total of incomes received by all persons from all sources in a specific time period. Personal income is not equal to National Income. Because social security payments. Corporate taxes, undistributed profits are deducted from national income and only the remaining is received by persons.
Personal Income = National Income at factor cost – Undistributed profits – Corporate taxes – Social security contributions + Transfer payments.

6) Disposable income : Personal income totally is not available for spending income tax is a payment which must be, deducted to obtain disposable income.
Disposable income = Personal income – Personal taxes
D.I = Consumption + Savings

7) Per capita income : National Income when divided by country’s population. We get per capita income.
Per capita Income = \(\frac{\text { National Income }}{\text { Total Population }}\)
The average standard of living of a country is indicated by per Capita income.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 7 National Income

Question 2.
Explain the various methods of calculating National Income. [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
There are three methods of measuring National Income.

  1. Output method or Product method
  2. Expenditure method
  3. Income method

‘Carin cross’ says National Income can be looked in any one of the three ways. As the national income measured by adding up everybody’s income by adding up everybody’s output and by adding up the value of all things that people buy and adding in their savings.

1) Output method (Product method) : The market value of total goods and services produced in an economy in a year is considered for estimating National Income. In order to arrive at the value of the product services, the total goods and services produced are multiplied with their market prices. .
Then National Income = (P1Q1 + P2Q2 + ……….. PnQn) – Depreciation – Indirect taxes + Net income from abroad.
Where P = Price
Q = Quantity
1, 2, 3 n = Commodities & services
There is a possibility of double counting. Care must be taken to avoid this. Only final goods and services are taken to compute National Income but not the raw materials or intermediary goods. Estimation of the National Income through this method will indicate the contribution of different sectors, the growth trends in each sector and the sectors which are lagging behind.

2) Expenditure method : In this method we add the personal consumption expenditure of households, expenditure of the firms, government purchase of goods and services net exports plus net income from abroad.
NI – EH + EF + EG + Net exports + Net income from abroad.
Here National Income = Private final consumption expenditure + Government final consumption expenditure + Net domestic capital formation + Net exports + Net income from abroad
EH = Expenditure of households
EF = Expenditure of firms
EG = Expenditure of Government
Care should be taken to include spending or expenditure made on final goods and services only.

3) Income method : In this method, the incomes earned by all factors of production are aggregated to arrive at the National Income of a country. The four factors of production receive incomes in the form of wages, rent, interest and profits. This is also national income at factor cost.
NI = W + I + R + P + Net income from abroad
NI = National income
W = Wages I = Interest
R = Rent
P = Profits
This method gives us National Income according to distribute shares.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 7 National Income

Question 3.
Describe the components of National Income.
Answer:
The total quantity of goods and services produced in the economy in a year is the National Income. The various components of the National Income are :

  1. Consumption (C)
  2. Gross Domestic Investment (I)
  3. Government Expenditure (G)
  4. Net foreign Investment (x – m) ‘

1) Consumption : By consumption, we mean the expenditure’ made on goods and services which directly satisfy our wants. Ex : Cloth, food products, education and health services etc. A major portion of the National Income comprises Only consumption goods and services.

Consumption expenditure depends on the level of income. Consumption and savings are the two parts of disposable income. Income which is left after consumption is the saving.

Consumption goods can be perishable or durable. Perishable goods are single use goods. Ex : Food. Durable goods can be used more than once for a longer time.
Ex : Vehicles, fans etc.

2) Gross Domestic Investment : The expenditure made on producer goods by the firms to produce goods and services is the investment expenditure. Ex : Machinery and tools etc. They satisfy wants indirectly. For instance, the plough used for producing rice cannot give us satisfaction directly. Producer goods are most essential for the growth in National Income.

3) Government expenditure : The expenditure incurred on various goods and services by the government is the public expenditure. This is what is meant by government consumption. Government provides roads, schools, medical facilities, irrigation, electricity, infrastructure facilities etc., to the society.
It also provides administrative services, defence services etc. The public expenditure is determined by the nature of economic system.

4) Net foreign Investment: Some goods produced in the economy are exported to other countries. In the same way, some goods which are required in the economy are imported into the country. If the value of exports is more than the value of imports, other countries are indebted to our country. So, it must be added to National Income. If the value of imports is more than exports, that difference must be deducted from National Income.
Exports – Imports = Net foreign investment National Income = C + I + G + (x – m)

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What are the factors that determine National Income ? [March 17]
Answer:
National Income is the total market value of all goods and services produced in a country during a given period of time. There are many factors that influence and determine the size of national income country.
a) Natural resources : The availability of natural resources in a country, its climatic conditions, geographical features, fertility of soil, mines and fuel resources etc., influence the size of National Income.
b) Quality and Quantity of factors of production : The national income of a country is largely influenced by the quality and quantity of a country’s stock of factors of production.
c) State of technology : Output and national income are influenced by the level of technical progress achieved by the country. Advanced techniques of production help in optimum utilization of a country’s national resources.
d) Political will and stability: Political will and stability in a country helps in planned economic development and for a faster growth of National Income.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 7 National Income

Question 2.
What is National Income at factor cost ? [March 18, 16]
Answer:
The cost of production of good is equal to the rewards paid to the factors which participated in the production process. So the cost of production of a firm is the rent paid to land, wages paid to labour, interest paid on capital and profits of the entrepreneur. These are received by suppliers of factors of production. There is a difference between net National Income at market prices and National Income at factor of cost. Imposition of tax increases the market prices. When these taxes deducted from net National Income, remaining income gets distributed among the factors of production.

Sometimes, the government may offer subsidies to encourage production of certain goods. The market prices of such goods will decrease to that extent. The value of subsidies is not included in net national product. So, it is to be added.
National Income at factor cost = NNP + Subsidies – Indirect taxes.

Question 3.
Mention any three definitions of National Income.
Answer:
National Income is the total market value of all goods and services produced in a country during a given period of time. ,
Several economists have defined National Incomes as follows :
Pigou’s definition : According to Pigou “National Income is that part of the objective income of the community including of course income derived from abroad which can be measured in money”.

Fisher’s definition : “The National dividend or income consists solely of services as received by ultimate consumers, whether from their material or from their human environment.

Marshall’s definition : “The labour and capital of country acting on its natural resources, produce annually a certain net aggregate of commodities, material and immaterial including services of all kinds. This is the net annual income or revenue of a country”.

Kuznet definition : According to Kuznets, National Income is the net output of commodities and services flowing during the year from the country’s productive system into the hands of the ultimate consumers or into the net additional to country’s capital goods”.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 7 National Income

Question 4.
What is the relationship between per capita income and population ?
Answer:
There is a close relationship between national income and population. These two together determine the per capita income. If rate of growth of national income is 6% and rate of growth of population is 3% the rate of growth of per capita income will be 3% and it can be expressed as follows.
QPC = Q – QP
QPC = Rate of growth of per capita income
Q = Rate of growth of national income
QP = Rate of growth of population
A rise in the per capita income indicates a rise in standard of living. The rise in per capita income is possible only when the rate of growth of population is less than the rate of growth of that national income.

Additional Questions

Question 5.
Importance of National Income estimates.
Answer:
The importance of national income studies is growing because of several reasons.

  1. The national income estimates are very important for preparing economic plans.
  2. It is a very important tool for framing economic policies. .
  3. It is very useful in making budgetary allocations.
  4. It helps us to compare economic growth with other countries.
  5. It is essential to calculate per capita incomes in a country and income inequalities.
  6. It helps the government in macroeconomic policy making.

Question 6.
Explain circular flow of goods, services and incomes.
Answer:
Income is flow from wealth where as wealth is a stock. In every economy income flows from households to firms and vice versa. Thus the factor market and the product market are closely related to each other.

The process of circular flow of income of income makes to understand that income flows from households, firms and firms to households. The same can be understood from the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 7 National Income 1
In this diagram from households to firms shows the spending of households on goods and services produced by firms. The second arrow from firm to households shows the flow of goods and services from firm to households. These two arrows show the goods and services market. The other two arrows in second half of the diagram (lower part) represents the factors of production market.

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
GNP (Gross National Product)
Answer:
It is the total value of all final goods and services produced in the economy in one year.
GNP = C + I + G + (x – m) where
C = Consumption
I = Gross National Investment
G = Government Expenditure
X = Exports
M = Imports
x – m = Net foreign trade.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 7 National Income

Question 2.
Per capita Income [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
National Income when divided by country’s population, percapita income is obtained.
Per capita Income = \(\frac{\text { National Income }}{\text { Total Population }}\)
The average standard of living of country is indicated by per capita income.

Question 3.
Depreciation
Answer:
Firms use continuously machines and tools for the production of goods and services. This results in a loss of value due to wear and tear of fixed capital. This loss suffered by fixed capital is called depreciation.

Question 4.
Disposable Income
Answer:
Personal income totally is not available for spending. Income tax is payment which must be deducted to obtain disposable income.
Disposable Income = Personal income – Personal taxes
DI = Consumption + savings

Additional Questions

Question 5.
Circular flow of income
Answer:
Flow of income from firms to households and from households to firms.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 7 National Income

Question 6.
Subsidies
Answer:
Share of government in price of a commodity.
Ex : Agriculture products.

Question 7.
National Income
Answer:
The total value of all final goods and services produced in the economy in a year.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 6th Lesson Theory of Distribution Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 6th Lesson Theory of Distribution

Essay Questions

Question 1.
Define Rent and explain Ricardian theory of Rent.
Answer:
David Ricardo was a 19th century economist of England, who propounded a systematic theory of rent. Ricardo defined rent as “that portion of the procedure of earth which is paid to the landlords for the use of the original and indestructible powers of soil”. According to Ricardo, rent arises due to differential in surplus occurring to agriculturists resulting from the differences in fertility of soil of different grades of land.

Rica rdiarz theory of rent is based on the principle of demand and supply. It arises in both extensive and intensive cultivation of land. When land is cultivated extensively, rent on superior land equals the excess of its produce over that of the inferior land. This can be explained with the following illustration.

We can imagine that a new island is discovered. Assume a batch of settlers go to that Island. Land in this Island is differ in fertility and situation. We assume that there are three grades of land A, B, and C. With a given application of labour and capital superior lands will yield more output than others. The difference in fertility will bring about differences in the cost of production, on the different grades of land. They first settle on A’ grade land for cultivation of com. A’ grade land yields say 20 quintals of corn with the investment of ₹ 300. The cbst of production per quintal is ₹ 15 (300/20). The price of corn in the market has to cover the cost of cultivation.

Otherwise the farmer will not produce com. Thus the price in the present case should be atleast ₹ 15 per quintal. As time passes, population increases and demand for land also increases. In such a case people have to cultivate next best land, i.e., ’B’ grade land. The same amount of Rs. 300 is spent of ‘B’ grade land gives only 15 quintals of corn as ‘B’ grade land is less fertile. The cost of cultivation on ‘B’ grade land risen to ₹ 20 (300/15) per quintal of corn. If the price of com per quintal in the market is then ₹ 20, the cultivator of ‘B’ grade and will be not cultivated. Therefore, the pride has to be high enough to cover the cost of cultivation on ‘B’ grade land. Hence the price also rises to ₹ 20. There is no surplus on B’ grade land. But on A grade land. But on A grade land, the surplus is 5 quintals or ₹ 100 (5 × 20).

Further, due to growth of population demand for land and corn increased. This necessitates, the cultivation of ‘C’ grade land with ₹ 300 investment cost. It yields only 10 quintals of com. Therefore the per quintal production cost rises to 30 (300/10). Then the price per quintal must be atleast ₹ 30 to cover the cost of production. Otherwise ‘C’ grade land will be withdrawn from cultivation. At price ₹ 30. ‘C grade land yield no surplus or rent. But A grade land yields still layer surplus of 10 quintals or ₹ 300 (10 × 30). But surplus or rent on ‘B’ grade land has 5 quintals or ₹ 150 (5 × 30). But there is no surplus or rent on ‘C’ grade land. It covers just the cost of cultivation. Hence, ‘C’ grade land is a marginal land which earns no rent or surplus.
This can also be explained with the following table.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution 1

The essence of Ricardian theory of rent.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution 2

  1. Rent is a pure surplus.
  2. Rent is differential surplus.
  3. Rent does., not determine or enter into price.
  4. Diminishing returns applies to agricultural production.
  5. Land is put to only one use i.e., for cultivation.

Ricardian theory of rent can be explained with the help of diagram.
In the above diagram the shaded area represents the rent or differential surplus. The least fertile land i.e., C does not carry any rent. So it is called marginal land or no rent land.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 2.
Explain Marginal Productivity Theory of Distribution.
Answer:
This theory was developed by J.B.Clark. According to his theory, the remuneration of a factor of production will be equal to its marginal productivity. The theory assumes perfect competition in the market for factors of production. In such a market, average cost and marginal cost of each unit of factor of production are the same as they are equal to the price or cost of a factor of production.

For example if four tailors can stitch ten shirts in a day and five tailors can stitch thirteen shirts in a day, then the marginal physical product of the 5th tailor is 3 shirts. If stitching charge for a shirt is ₹ 100/-, then the marginal value product of three shirts is ₹ 300/-. According to this theory the 5th person will be remunerated ₹ 300/- marginal physical product is the additional output obtained by using an additional unit of the factor of production. If we multiply the additional output by market price we will get marginal value product or marginal revenue product.

At first stage when additional units of labour are employed the marginal productivity of labourer increases up to certain extent due to economies of scale. If additional units of labour are employed beyond that point the marginal productivity of labour decreases. This can be shown in the following figure.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution 3
In the figure OX axis represent units of labour and OY represent price/revenue/cost. At a given price OP the firm will employ OL units of labour where price OP = L. If it employees less than ‘OL’ i.e., OL1 units MRP will be E1L1 which is higher than the price OR If firm employers more than OL units upto OL2 price is OP is more than E2L2. So the firm decreases employment until price = MRP till OL. At that point ‘E’ the additional unit of labour is remunerated equal to his marginal productivity.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 3.
What is meant by Real Wages ? And what are the factors that determine Real wages ?
Answer:
The amount of goods and services that can be purchased with the money wages at any particular time is called real wage. Thus real wage is the amount of purchasing power received by worker through his money wage.
Factors determining the real wage :
1. Methods of form of payment: Besides money wages, normally the labourers get same additional facilities provided by their management. Ex : Free housing, free medical facilities etc. As a result this real wage of the worker will be high.

2. Purchasing power of money : An important factor which determines the real wage is the purchasing power of money which depends upon the general price level. A rise in general price level will mean a full in the purchasing power of money, causes decline in real wages.

3. Nature of work: The working conditions also determine the real wages of labourer. Less duration of work, ventilation fresh air etc., result in high real wages, lack of then facilities real wages are low eventhough money wages are high.

4. Future prospects : Real wage is said to be higher in those jobs where there is possibility of promotions hike in wages and vice-versa.

5. Nature of work : Real wages are also determined by the risk and danger involved in the work. If work i$ risky wages of labourer will be low though money wages are high. Ex : Captain in a submarine.

6. Timely payment : If a labourer receives payment regularly and timely the real wages of the labourer is high although his money wage is pretty less and vice-versa.

7. Social prestige : Real wage depends on social prestige. The money wages of Bank officer and judge are equal, but the real wage of a judge is higher than bank officer.

8. Period and expenses of education : Period and expenses of training also affect real wages.

Question 4.
What is meant by wages ? Explain briefly various theories of wages.
Answer:
Wages are a payment made for the services of labour, either mental or physical.
According to Benham “sum of money paid under contract by an employer to a worker for the services rendered”.
Theories of wages:
1. Subsistence theory of wages : This theory was formulated by a group of French Economics known as Physiocrats. This theory is also termed as “Iron Law of wages”. According to this theory, wages will always be at a level to enable the labourer and his family to fulfill the minimum subsistence level. If the wages are raised above the subsistence level, supply of labour will increase. If wages will decrease to the subsistence level, the supply of labour will decrease. Hence wages will always be at the subsistence level.

2. Wage fund theory : This theory developed by J.S.Mill. According to this theory every entrepreneur will keep aside a part of the variable capital to pay wages as the labourers cannot wait for their wages till goods are sold. Such part of variable capital is known as ‘Wages fund” or “Circulating capital”.
Average wage rate = \(\frac{\text { Amount of wage fund }}{\text { Number of labourers }}\)

3. Residual claimant theory of wages : This theory proposed the residual claimant theory of wages. According to Walker is a residual claimant. After paying rent, interest and profit from total revenue, the balance will be paid as wages to labourers.
Wages = Total Revenue – (Rent + Interest + Profit)

4. Taussig’s theory of wages: This theory modified by Taussig. According to Taussig, wages are equal to the discounted marginal product of labour. According to him, the labourer cannot get full value of the marginal productivity. In order to meet the expenditure of labourer in course of production, the employer will have to pay wages in advance. Hence, the employers deducts a certain percentage from the final output inorder to compensate the risk involved in advance payments to the labourers.

5. Modern theory of wages : This theory proposed by Marshall and J.R.Hicks. According to this theory, the wages of labourers are determined by the demand for and supply of labourers wage is determined at that point where the demand and supply of labourer are equal.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 5.
What is meant by interest ? Explain briefly various theories of interest.
Answer:
In Economics, interest is regarded as the payment for the use of the service of capital.
Carver said “Interest is the income which goes to capital”.
Theories of interest:
1. Abstinence or Waiting theory of interest: Nassau Senior proposed the Ah f inence theory of interest. According to him capital can be created by postponing consumption. It means when people save, they abstain from consumption. Abstaining from consumption is disagreeable and painful. As lending involves sacrifice, it is necessary to reward the lender in the form of interest.

2. Agio theory of interest or Bohm – Bawerk’s theory: According to Bohm – Bawerk, interest arises because people prefer present goods to future goods of the same kind and quantity. People prefer present enjoyment to future enjoyment. As a result of saving, people lose present enjoyment.
Bohm-Bawerk gave three reasons for the emergence of rate of interest. They are :

  1. The demand for goods is greater now than in future as people have different demands for goods in the present than in the future.
  2. People under estimate future wants due to lack of imagination to judge the intensity of their future wants, lack of will to resist temptation of satisfying present wants and they think they may not be alive to satisfy wants as future is uncertain.
  3. Present goods are considered technically superior over future goods. By consuming goods at present lead to accumulation of productive capital for future. Hence interest is paid as a premium for the postponement of consumption.

3. Productivity theory of interest : According to Classical Economists, capital is demanded because of its productivity. Whenever additional units of capital are used, productivity will increase upto a certain point and later decreases beyond that point. Additional units of capital are not as productive as the earlier units as a result of the law of variable proportions.

According to this theory, rate of interest is just equal to the productivity of capital. Hence, higher the demand for capital, lower will be the rate of interest and vice versa. As per the theory, rate of interest is inversely related to the demand for capital.

4. Loanable funds theory of interest: The lonable funds theory or the neo classical theory was first formulated by Knutt Wicksell. According to this theory, interest is determined by the equilibrium of demand for and supply of loanable funds in the market.

5. Time preference theory : Irvin’g Fisher proposed the time preference theory of ! interest. Fisher’s theory emphasized time preference as a cause of interest. He also considered the role of marginal productivity or “rate of return over cost that determines interest”. Hence, rate of interest is determined by time preference.

6. Keynes’ liquidity preference theory: Keynes proposed a monetary explanation of the rate of interest. According to Keynes, interest is determined by both the demand for and supply of money.
According to Keynes “Interest is the reward paid for paring with liquidity for the specified period”.

7. Supply money: Supply of money refers to the total quantity of money in circulation. Supply of money is fixed or perfectly inelastic at a given point of time. Supply of money is determined by the central bank of a country.

8. Demand for money : People demand money for its liquidity. The desire to hold ready cash is liquidity preference. Liquidity preference is positively related to the rate of interest. People demand money basically for these reasons.

  1. Transactions motive
  2. Precautionary motive
  3. Speculative motive.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 6.
What is meant by profit ? Explain briefly various theories of profit.
Answer:
Profit is the reward paid to the entrepreneur for his services as an organizer in the process of production.
Theories of profit:
1. Dynamic theory of profit: This theory was propounded by J.B. Clark. According to Clark “Profit is the difference between the price and cost of production of commodity”. He viewed that profit as a reward for entrepreneurial dynamism. Dynamic changes like increase in population, new method of production etc., result increase in profit. In a static economy due to lack of these changes entrepreneurs receive only wages but not profit. Hence profits are the result of the dynamic changes only.

2. Innovation theory: This theory was developed by Joseph Schumpeter. According to Schumpeter, “profit is the reward paid to the entrepreneur for his inventive skills”. Because of these inventions profits arise as a difference between prices and costs of production.
According to Schumpeter, entrepreneur must break the circular flow by introducing innovations they are :

  1. Introduction of new good.
  2. Introduction of new method of production.
  3. Reorganisation of industry.
  4. Opening up of a new market.
  5. Discovery of new source of raw materials.

So these innovations, the cost of production remains below its selling price and thus profit arises.
Thus profit is paid to entrepreneur for innovating but not for risk taking.

3. The risk theory of profit: This theory was proposed, by Prof. Hawley. Profits are the reward for an entrepreneur for risk-taking. So the residual part of income after paying all factors of production goes to the entrepreneur for risk taking. Fluctuations in future prices, demand etc., are involved in risk taking.
According to Prof. Hawley those who face risks in business will be able to earn an excess of payment above the actual value of risk in the form of profit.

4. Uncertainty theory of profit: This theory formulated by Prof. Knight. It is a modified version of risk bearing theory of profits. According to him profit as the reward for bearing uninsurable risks and uncertainties. He classified risks into two types.

  1. Unforseen insurable risks like fire, theft.
  2. Unforseen non insurable risks like changes in prices, demand and supply. These uninsurable risks cannot be calculated.

According to Prof. Knighit, “Profit cannot be treated as the reward for risk taking only for reward for uncertainty bearing”.

5. Walker’s theory of profit: This theory developed by Walker. According to Walker “Profits are a rent paid for the abilities of entrepreneur”. Walker theory states that profits arise due to the differences in efficiency and ability of entrepreneurs. Hence efficient and able entrepreneurs’ are paid profits.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the concept of Distribution.
Answer:
Distribution refers to that branch of economies which analyses how the national income of a community is divided among the various factors of production, distribution then refer to the sharing of the wealth that is produced among factors of production. It is the pricing of factors of production. The distribution of income may be personal or functional economies is concerned with functional distribution. The distinction between them is briefly explained here.

1. Functional distribution : Functional distribution deals with the study of factor incomes. It means the theory of factor pricing. The prices of land, labour, capital and organisation are called rent, wages, interest and profit respectively. Therefore, it is the study and determination of rent, wages, interest and profit. It concern the pattern of distribution of national income as rent, wage, interest and profits. Thus it is not concerned with individuals and their individual income, but with the agents’of production. The study of functional shares has been carried on both at the macro and micro levels.
Micro-distribution: The theory of micro-distribution explains how the prices of factors of production are determined.
Ex : Micro-distribution we study how wage rate of labour is determined.

Macro-distribution : Macro distribution explains the share of a factor of production in the national income.
Ex : The share of labour in the national income.

2. Personal distribution: It refers to the distribution of income or wealth of a country among its people. It studies how income or wealth is distributed among individuals or persons. It studies how much income is earned by an individual, but not how it is earned or in how many forms it is earned. The causes of income inequalities can be known by studying personal distribution.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 2.
What are the factors that determine factor prices ? [March 16]
Answer:
The demand and supply of a factor of production determine its price. The demand for a factor of production depends on the following.

  1. It depends on the demand for the goods produced by it.
  2. Price of the factor determines its demand.
  3. Prices of other factors or co-operative factors determine the demand for a factor.
  4. Technological changes determine the demand for a factor.
  5. The demand for a factor increases due to increase in its production.

Factors that determine the supply of a factor of production.

  1. The size of the population and it’s age composition.
  2. Mobility of the factor of production.
  3. Efficiency of the factor of production.
  4. Geographical conditions,
  5. Wage also determines the supply of this factor.
  6. Income.

Question 3.
Explain the concept of Quasi-rent. [March 17]
Answer:
The concept of Qliasi rent was first introduced by Marshall. According to Marshall, quasi rent is the income derived from machines and other man made appliances of production. Whose supply is inelastic in the short run in relation to their demand. If the demand for these factors increases, their prices will also increase due to their inelasticity of supply in R the short period. The rent or surplus above the factor price will disappear in the long run.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution 4
In the above diagram man made appliances are shown in ‘OX’ axis and ‘OY’ axis shown rent SPS is short period supply curve. LPS is long period supply curve. In the above diagram it is observed that rent will disappear in the long run.

Question 4.
Explain the concept of Scarcity rent. [March 18]
Answer:
Marshall explained the concept of scarcity rent on the basis of demand and supply. In general land has indirect demand or derive demand. If there is an explosion of population demand for land increases this result rise in its price. The surplus earned by land above its price is called scarcity rent.

The supply of land is fixed and inelastic. The demand for land will determine the rent by influencing its price. Hence rent arises due to the scarcity in the supply of factors of production.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution 5
In the given diagram on ‘OX’ axis represent supply and demand for land. ‘OY axis represents Rent. SL is supply of land. It is perfectly inelastic. When DD curve shifts upward to D1D1. So price increases from OR to OR1. Similarly if demand curve further shifts from D1D1 to D2D2 rent price further increases from OR1 to OR2.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 5.
Explain the concepts of Gross interest, Net interest and their components.
Answer:
Gross interest: The payment which the lender receives from the borrower excluding the principal is gross interest. Gross interest includes net interest or pure interest also.
Gross interest include the following four elements :
a) Net interest: Net interest is the reward for the services of the capital alone. Interest paid on government bonds and government loans is the net interest. If capital has mobility. The net interest any where will be the same.

b) Insurance against risk : Lending money as alone to somebody always involves a risk that the borrower may not repay it. These risks are two types :
1. Trade risk
2. Personal risk
In order to cover these risks. The lender charges some extra amount in addition to the net interest.

c) Compensation for inconvenience: Lending may also some inconvenience because the lender lends money only by saving i.e. by restricting his consumption out of income. In addition to this the lender may not get back his money when he requires for his own use.. He thus suffers from certain inconveniences. In order to compensate this sort of inconvenience he charge some extra over and above net interest.

d) Reward for management services : The lender has to maintain a record of all repayments and charges. He has to remind the debtors about the repayment of loan by post or by personal visits. He has maintain an office and clerical staff. Sometimes he has to approach the court also in case of non-payment of loan by the debtor for all these sorts of management work. He deserves some payment.

Question 6.
Explain the components of Gross profits and Net profits.
Answer:
Gross profit is considered as a difference between total revenue and cost of production. The following are the components of gross profit.

  1. The rent payable to his own land or buildings includes gross profit.
  2. The interest payable to his own business capital.
  3. The wage payable to the entrepreneur for his management includes gross profit.
  4. Depreciation charges or user cost of production and insurance charges are include in gross profit.
  5. Net profits are reward paid for the organiser’s entrepreneurial skills.

Components :

  1. Reward for risk bearing : Net profit is the reward for bearing uninsurable risks and uncertainities.
  2. Reward for coordination : It is the reward paid for co-ordinating the factors of production in right proportion in the process of production.
  3. Reward for marketing services : It is the profit paid to the entrepreneur for his ability to purchase the services of factors of production.
  4. Reward for innovations: It is the reward paid for innovations of new products and alternative uses to natural resources.
  5. Wind fall gains : These gains arise as a result of natural calamities, wars and artificial scarcity are also include in net profits.

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Contract rent [March 16]
Answer:
It is the hire charges for any durable good. Ex : Cycle rent, room rent etc. It is a periodic payment made for the use of any material good. The amount paid by the tenant cultivator to the landlord annually may be also called contract rent. Ex. : The rent that a tenant pays to the house owner monthly as per an agreement made earlier or the hiring charges of a cycle ₹ 10 per hour is also contract rent.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 2.
Economic rent
Answer:
The ordinary use of the term ‘rent’ means any periodic payment for the hire of anything such as garriages, .buildings etc. Economic rent is the pure rent payable as a reward for utilising the productivity of land. It is derived by subtracting the elements like interest, wages, profits and depreciation from the gross rent 6r contract rent. To David Ricardo; it is surplus over costs or expenses of cultivation.

Question 3.
Scarcity rent
Answer:
Prof. Marshall explained the concept of scarcity rent on the basis of demand and supply. Scarcity rent is the surplus earned by land which has inelastic supply. In general land has indirect demand or derived demand. If there is an explosion of population, demand for land increases resulting in a rise in its price. The surplus earned by land above its price is called scarcity rent.

Question 4.
Quasirent
Answer:
The concept of quasi-rent was first introduced by Marshall. Quasi rent according to Marshall is the surplus earned by instruments of production other than land. It is the income earned from man made factors of production! Such as machinery, buildings, tools etc. This is short term concept.

Question 5.
Transfer earnings [March 18]
Answer:
Transfer earnings refer to the surplus earned by a factor of production is its present use-over its next best use.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 6.
Money wages
Answer:
Money ’ ages are the remuneration received by the labourer in the form of money for the physical and mental service rendered by him or her in the production process.
Ex : If a labourer is paid ₹ 30/- per day. ₹ 30/- is the money wage.

Question 7.
Real wages [March 16]
Answer:
Real wage is the purchasing power of money wages in terms of goods and services.

Question 8.
Time wages
Answer:
Time wage is the amount paid for labourers for a fixed period of work i.e. weakly, daily, monthly etc.

Question 9.
Piece wages
Answer:
Piece wage is the amount paid for labourers according to volume of work done by them.

Question 10.
Gross interest
Answer:
The payment which the lender receives from the borrower excluding the principal is gross interest.
Gross interest = Net interest + [Reward for risk taking + Reward for Inconvenience + Reward for management]

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 6 Theory of Distribution

Question 11.
Net interest [March 18, 17]
Answer:
Net interest is tjie reward for the service of the capital loan.
Ex : Net interest paid on government bonds and government loans.

Question 12.
Gross profit
Answer:
Gross profit is considered as a difference between total revenue and cost of production.
Gross profit = Net profit + [Implicit rent + Implicit wage + Implicit interest + Depreciation charges + Insurance premium]

Question 13.
Net profit
Answer:
Net profit is the reward paid for the organizer’s entreprenurial skills.
Net profit = Gross profit – [Implicit rent + Implicit wage + Implicit interest + Depreciation charges + Insurance premium]

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 4th Lesson Theory of Production Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 4th Lesson Theory of Production

Essay Questions

Question 1.
Explain the law of variable proportions. [March 18, 17]
Answer:
The law of variable proportions has been developed by the 19th century economists David Ricardo and Marshall. The law is associated with the names of these two economists. The law states that by increasing one variable factor and keeping other factors constant, how to change the level of output, total output first increases at increasing rate, then at a diminishing rate and later decreases. Hence this law is also known as the “Law of Diminishing returns”.

Marshall stated in the following words.

“An increase in capital and labour applied in the cultivation of land causes in general less than proportionate increase in the amount of produce raised, unless it happens to coincide with an improvement in the arts of agriculture”.
Assumptions :

  1. The state of technology remain constant.
  2. The analysis relates to short period.
  3. The law assumes labour in homogeneous.
  4. Input prices remain unchanged.

Explanation of the Law :
Suppose a farmer has ‘4’ acres of land he wants to increase output by increasing the number of labourers, keeping other factors constant. The changes in total production, average product and marginal product can be observed in the following table.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 1
In the above table total product refers to the total output produced per unit of time by all the labourers employed.

Average product refers to the product per unit of labour marginal product refers to additional product obtained by employing an additional labour.
In the above table there are three stages of production.

1st stage i.e., increasing returns at 2 units total output increases average product increases and marginal product reaches maximum.
2nd stage i.e., diminishing returns from 3rd unit onwards TP increases diminishing rate and reaches maximum, MP becomes zero, AP continuously decreases.
3rd stage i.e., negative returns from 8th unit TP decreases AP declines and MP becomes negative.
This can be explained in the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 2
In the diagram on ‘OX’, axis shown units labourer and OY’ axis show TP, MP, and AP. 1st stage TP, AP increases MP is maximum. In the 2nd stage TP maximum, AP MP is zero. At 3rd stage TP declines, AP also declines, MP becomes negative.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 2.
Explain the law of returns to scale.
Answer:
The law of returns to scale relate to long run production function. In the long run it is possible to alter the quantities of all the factors of production. If all factors of production are increased in given proportion the total output has to increase in the same proportion. Ex : The amounts of all the factors are doubled, the total output has to be doubled increasing all factors in the same proportion is increasing the scale of operation. When all inputs are changed in a given proportion, then the output is changed in the same proportion. We have constant returns to scale and finally arises diminishing returns. Hence as a result of change in the scale of production, total product increases at increasing rate, then at a constant rate and finally at a diminishing rate.
Assumptions :

  1. All inputs are variable.
  2. It assumes that state of technology remain the same. The returns to scale can be shown in the following table.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 3
The above table reveals the three patterns of returns to scale. In the 1th place, when the scale is expanded upto 3 units, the returns are increasing. Later and upto 4th units, it remains constant and finally from 5th on words the returns go on diminishing.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 4
In the diagram on ‘OX’ axis shown scale of production, on OY’ axis shown total product. RR1 represents increasing returns R1S – Constant returns; SS1 represents diminishing returns.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 3.
Distinguish between internal and external economies.
Answer:
Economies of large scale production can be grouped into two types.

  1. Internal economies
  2. External economies.

1. Internal Economies:
Internal economies are those which arise from the expansion of the plant, size or from its own growth. These are enjoyed by that firm only.
“Internal economies are those which are open to a single factory or a single firm independently of the action of other firms”. – Cairncross
i) Technological Economies : The firm may be running many productive establishments. As the size of the productive establishments increase, some mechanical advantages may be obtained. Economies can be obtained from linking process to another process i.e. paper making and pulp making can be combined. It also used superior techniques and increased specialization.

ii) Managerial Economies : Managerial economies arises from specialisation of management and mechanisation of managerial functions. For a large size firm it becomes possible for the management to divide itself into specialised departments under specialised personnel. This increases efficiency of management at all levels. Large firms have the opportunity to use advanced techniques of communication, computers etc. All these things help in saving of time and improve the efficiency of the management.

iii) Marketing Economies : The large firm can buy raw materials cheaply, because it buys in bulk. It can secure special concession rates from transport agencies. The product can be advertise better. It will be able to sell better.

iv) Financial Economies : A large firm can arise funds more easily and cheaply a small one. It can borrow from bankers upon better security.

v) Risk bearing Economies : A large firm incurs unrisk and it can also reduce risks. It can spread risks in different ways. It can undertake diversifications of output. It can buy raw materials from several firms.

vi) Labour Economies : A big firm employs a large number of workers. Each worker is given the kind of job he is fit for.

2. External Economies :
An external economy is one which is available to all the firms in an industry. External economies are available as an industry grows in size.

  1. Economies of Concentration : When a number pf firms producing an identical product are localised in one place, certain facilities become available to all. Ex : Cheap transport facility, availability of skilled labour etc.
  2. Economies of Information : When the number of firms in an industry increases collective action and co-operative effort becomes possible. Research work can be carried on jointly. Scientific journal can be published. There is possibility for exchange of ideas.
  3. Economies of Disintegration : When the number of firms increases, the firm may agree to specialise. They may divide among themselves the type of products of stages of production. Ex : Cotton industry.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 4.
Explain short-run cost structure of a Firm.
Answer:
Costs are divided into two categories i.e.,

  1. Short run cost curves
  2. Long run cost curves.

In short run by increasing only one factor i.e., (labour) and keeping other factor constant. The short run cost are again divided into two types.

  1. General costs
  2. Economic costs.
    1. General costs :

i) Money costs : Production is the outcome of the efforts of factors of production like land, labour, capital and organisation. So, rent to land, wage to labour, interest to capital and profits to entrepreneur has to paid in the form of money is called money cost.

ii) Real cost: Adam Smith regarded pains and sacrifices of labour as real cost. So it cannot be measured interms of money.

iii) Opportunity cost: Factors of production are scarce and have alternative uses. The opportunity cost of a factor is the benefit that is foregone from the next best alternative use.

2. Economic costs :
i) Fixed costs : The cost of production which remains constant even the production may be increase or decrease is known as fixed cost. The amount spent by the cost of plant and equipment, permanent staff are treated as fixed costs.

ii) Variable cost: The cost of production which is changing according to changes in the production is said to be variable cost. In the long period all costs are variable costs. It include price of raw materials, payment of fuel, excise taxes etc. Marshall called “Prime cost”.

iii) Average cost: Average cost means cost per units of output. If we divided total cost by the number of units produced, we will get average cost.
AC = \(\frac{\text { Total cost }}{\text { Output }}\)
iv) Marginal cost: Marginal cost is the additional cost of production producing one more unit.
MC = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{TC}}{\Delta \mathrm{Q}}\)
v) Total cost: Total cost is the sum of total fixed cost and total variable cost.
TC = FC + VC
The short term cost in relation to output are explained with the help of a table.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 5
In the above table shows that as output is increased in the 1st column, fixed cost remains constant. Variable costs have changed as and when there are changes in output. To produce more output in the short period, more variable factors have to be employed. By adding FC & VC we get total cost different levels of output. AC falls output increases, reaches its minimum and then rises MC also change in the total cost associated with a change in output. This can be shown in the diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 6
In the above diagram on ‘OX’ axis taken by output and ‘OY taken by costs. The shapes of different cost curves explain the relationship between output and different costs. TFC is horizontal to ‘X’ axis. It indicates that increase in output has no effect on fixed cost. TVC on the other side increases along with level of output. TC curve rises as output increases.

Additional Questions

Question 1.
Explain Production function.
Answer:
Production function is technical concept. It explains the physical relationship between input and output at any period of time. It represents functional relationship between inputs and the amount of output produced.
According to Stigler “Production is the name given to the relationship between rates of inputs of productive services and the rate of output of product”.
The production function can be expressed mathematically as follows.
Gx = f (L, K, R, N, T)
Gx = Output
f = Functional relationship
L = Amount of Labour
K = Amount of Capital
R = Raw material
N = Natural resources or land
T = State of Technology.
Where Gx is dependent variable and is determined by the inputs used, whereas L, K, R, N, T are independent variables.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 2.
Explain Law of supply.
Answer:
The law of supply explains the functional relationship between price of a commodity and its quantity supplied. The law of supply can be stated as follows “Other things remaining the same, as the price of a commodity rises its supply is extended and as the price falls its supply is contracted”.

The law of supply can be explained with the help of supply schedule and supply curve.

Supply Schedule : Supply schedule explains various amounts of good that the seller offers for sale at different prices. It represents the functional relationship between price and quantities supplied. There is direct relationship between price and supply. This can be shown in the following schedule.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 7
The above schedule high price i.e, ₹ 5.00 per unit 1000 units are supplied and at ₹ 1 per 200 units are supplied. It means high price indicate high supply and low price indicates low supply. So, it shows the direct relationship between price and supply.

Supply curve :
A supply curve can be drawn with the help of above supply schedule to explain the direct relationship between price and supply.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 8
In the above diagram supply is shown on ‘OX’ axis and price is shown ‘OY axis. SS is supply curve. It slopes upwards from left to right. The slope of supply curve is always positive. Because there is direct relationship between the price and supply.’

Question 3.
Define Factors of production.
Answer:
Factors that help in the production process are called factors of production.
Ex : land, labour, capital and organization
1) Land : Land stands in economics for natural resources. There are nature given resources like soil, earth, water, rainfall, forests, mines, clijnate etc. All these come under land. Land is the productive equipment given by nature. The remuneration to land is called rent.

2) Labour : Labour is man’s effort. It may be physical or mental labour. Any service offered for a price is considered as labour in economics. All services rendered to produce scarce goods come under labour. The remuneration to labour is called wage.

3) Capital : Capital is man made production equipment. Factories, buildings, vehicles, rail-roads, roads, irrigation dam etc., come under capital. The remuneration to capital is interest.

4) Organisation or Entrepreneurship : The entrepreneur or businessmen brings together all the factors of production required for production. He bears the risk is doing so. He coordinates the functions of different factors. Profit is the remuneration for organisation or entrepreneurship.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 4.
Define land and explain the characteristics of land.
Answer:
Land stands in economics for natural resources. There are nature given resources like soil, earth, water, rainfall, forests, mines, climate etc., all these come under land. Land is the productive, equipment given by nature. The remuneration to land is called rent. Characteristics of land:

  1. Land is a free gift of nature.
  2. The supply of land is perfectly inelastic from the point of view of economy.
  3. Land cannot be shifted from one place to another place.
  4. It does not yield any result unless human effort’s are employed.

Question 5.
Define labour. Explain the characteristics of labour.
Answer:
Labour is man’s effort. It may be physical (or) mental labour. Any’service offered for a price is considered as labour in economics. The remuneration to labour is called wage. Characteristics of labour:

  1. Labour is inseparable from the labourer himself.
  2. Labour is highly ‘perishable’. It means labour lost cannot store his labour.
  3. Labour has a very weak bargaining power.
  4. Labour power differs from labourer to labourer of their skills.
  5. The supply curve of a labourer is backward bending.

Question 6.
What is supply ? What are the determinants of supply.
Answer:
The supply of a commodity means the total quantity of the commodity that sellers offer to sell at different prices from the stock of that commodity existing at any given time. The supply of commodity depends upon the following factors.
Determinants of supply :

  1. Price of the commodity: The supply of the commodity depends upon the price of that commodity. When price falls, supply falls and when price rises, supply also rises. Thus price and supply are directly related.
  2. Factor prices : The cost of production of a commodity depends upon the prices of various factors of production.
  3. Prices of related goods : The supply of the commodity depends upon the prices of related goods. If the price of a substitute good goes up, the producer will be induced to
  4. State of technology: Technological improvements determine supply of a commodity. Progress in technology leads to reduction in the cost of production which will increase supply.
  5. Government policy : Imposition of heavy taxes as a commodity discourages its production. Hence production decreases.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 7.
Explain the nature of revenue curves untier perfect competition.
Answer:
If competition is perfect in market, the market is known as perfectly competitive market. Due to the existing features the total demand and total supply pf a commodity interact to determine the price in the industry and individual firm. Hence, an individual seller or firm is a price taker but not a price maker in perfect competition, ‘therefore he can sell any quantity at the ruling price. Thus, the demand curve is parallel to X-axis. The nature of Average Revenue (AR) and Marginal Revenue (MR) and their relationship under perfect competition can be better understood from the following schedule.
Revenue Schedule :
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 9
The above table indicates that in perfect competition price remains the same irrespective of the number of units sold. Therefore, the total revenue increases at a constant rate. AR and MR are equal. There is no difference among price AR and MR. This can be reveals the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production 10
In the diagram X-axis represents number of units (output) and Y-axis represents revenue. DP is demand curve.

In diagram, the Average Revenue curve (AR) is horizontal straight line parallel to the X-axis and Marginal Revenue Curve MR coincides with it. Because the seller can sell number of units given the price, the AR curve facing the seller is a horizontal line.

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Production function [March 18]
Answer:
The production function is the none for the relation between the physical inputs and the physical outputs of a film. Production of a firm, production function explains the functional relationship between inputs and outputs this can be as follows Gx = f (L, K, R, N, T).

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 2.
Law of supply [March 16]
Answer:
The law of supply explains the functional relationship between price of a commodity and its quantity supplied. The law of supply can be stated as follows. “Other things remaining the same, as the price of a commodity rises its supply is extended and as the price falls its supply is contracted”.

Question 3.
Factors of production
Answer:
Factors that help in the production process are called factors of production.
Ex : land, labour, capital and organization.

Question 4.
Average cost
Answer:
If we divided total cost, by the number of units produced. We will get average cost. Average cost means cost per unit of output.
AC = \(\frac{\mathrm{TC}}{\text { Output }}\)

Question 5.
Marginal cost
Answer:
Marginal cost is the additional cost of production producing one more unit in other words it is the addition made to total cost by producing one more unit of a commodity.
MC = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{TC}}{\Delta \mathrm{Q}}\)

Additional Questions

Question 6.
Production
Answer:
Production is the process that converts inputs into output in economies production includes services along with physical goods.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 7.
Short period
Answer:
Short period is a period in which a producer is unable to change factors of production to increase output. This relates to law of variable proportions.

Question 8.
Long period
Answer:
Long period is a period in which a producer is unable to change factors of production to increase output. This relates to returns to scale.

Question 9.
Average product
Answer:
It refers to the product per unit of labour it is Obtained by dividing total product by the number of labourers employed.
AP = \(\frac{\mathrm{TP}}{\mathrm{L}}\)

Question 10.
Marginal product
Answer:
It is the additional product by employing an additional labour.
MP = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{TP}}{\Delta \mathrm{L}}\)

Question 11.
Fixed factor
Answer:
Fixed factors are those costs which can’t be changed by the producer in the short period.
Ex : Buildings, Machinery etc.

Question 12.
Variable factors
Answer:
The factors of production which are possible to change in relation to a change in output is known as variable factors in the long run all factors of production are variable.
Ex : Labour, Raw materials.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 13.
Change in scale of production
Answer:
It refers that output will be increase by increasing inputs in the long period.

Question 14.
Internal economies
Answer:
It refers that when a firm expands output by increasing all inputs.

Question 15.
External economics
Answer:
It refers to one which is available to all the firms in an industry. External economies are available as an industry grows in size.

Question 16.
Supply
Answer:
The quantity of a commodity that a seller is prepared to sell at a particular price and at a particular time is known as supply. The supply curve slopes upwards from left to right.

Question 17.
Supply function
Answer:
It explains the functional relation between supply and the factors of production of a good.

Question 18.
Opportunity cost
Answer:
The opportunity cost of a factor is the benefit i.e, forgone from the next best alternative use.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 19.
Fixed cost
Answer:
The cost of production which remains constant even the production may be increase (or) decrease is known as fixed cost.
Ex : Machinery, permanent staff salaries.

Question 20.
Variable cost
Answer:
The cost of production which is changed according to changes in the production is said to be variable cost. In the long period all costs are variable costs it include price of raw materials, wages of labour, power transport charges etc.

Question 21.
Total Revenue
Answer:
Total revenue of a producer depends on the price and the quantity of output sold in the market.
Total Revenue = Price × Quantity of output
TR = P × Q

Question 22.
Average Revenue
Answer:
Average revenue is the revenue per unit of output. Average revenue is obtained by dividing to revenue by the number of unit sold.
AR = \(\frac{\text { TR }}{\mathrm{Q}}\)

Question 23.
Marginal Revenue
Answer:
Marginal revenue is the additional revenue earned by selling one more unit of the product. In other words change in total revenue arising from the sale of an additional unit of output is called marginal revenue.
MR = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{TR}}{\Delta \mathrm{Q}}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 4 Theory of Production

Question 24.
Total Cost
Answer:
Total cost can be obtained by adding total fixed costs and variable costs.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 2nd Lesson Theory of Consumers Behaviour Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 2nd Lesson Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Essay Questions

Question 1.
Explain the law of diminishing marginal utility and its limitations. [March 17]
Answer:
Hermann Heinrich Gossen was the first economist to explain the law of diminishing marginal utility in 1854. It is also known as Gossen’s ‘first law’. In 1890 Marshall in his principles of economics developed and popularised this analysis. This law explains the functional relationship between the stock of commodity and the marginal utility of the commodity.

According to Marshall “The additional benefit which a person derives from a given increase of his stock thing diminishes with every increase in the stock that he already has”.

“A consumer increases the consumption of any one commodity keeping constant the consumption of all other commodities the marginal utility of the variable commodity must eventually decline”. Kenneth E.Boulding.

The law says that as we go consuming a commodity satisfaction derives from its additional units goes on diminishes.
Assumptions :

  1. Rationality : Consumer is a rational man which means he always tries to get maximum satisfaction.
  2. Cardinal measurement of utility : Utility is a cardinal concept, i.e., utility can be measured and compared numerically.
  3. Utilities are independent: It implies that utility of any commodity depends as its own quantity
  4. Homogeneous : Units of the commodity are similar in quantity, size, taste and colour etc.
  5. No time gap : There should not be any time gap between the consumption of one unit and other it.
  6. Constant marginal utility : It is assumed that the marginal utility of money remains constant. ’
  7. Total & marginal utility : Total utility : Total satisfaction obtained by the consumer from the consumption of a given quantity of commodity.
    TUn = f(Qn)
    Where TUn = Total utility of n commodity,
    f = functional relationship,
    Qn = Quantity of n commodity.

Marginal utility: Marginal utility is the addition made to the total utility by consuming one more unit of the commodity.
It can be explained as
MUn = TUn – TUn-1
MUn = Marginal utility of nth unit
TUn = Total utility of nth unit
TUn-1 = Total utility of n – 1 units.
MU may also be expressed as follows.
Marginal utility is the additional utility derived from the consumption of an extra unit of commodity.
MU = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{TU}}{\Delta \mathrm{C}}\)
Where ∆TU = Change in total utility
∆C = Change in no. of units consumed.

Explanation of the law : The law of diminishing marginal utility explains the relation between the quantity of good and its marginal utility. If a person goes on increasing his stock of a thing, the marginal utility derived from an additional unit declines. We show this tendency with an imaginary table given below.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 1
In the table let us suppose that one is fond of apples. As he consumes one apple after another he derives less and less satisfaction. The first unit consumed with atmost pleasure. For the second, the intensity of his desire diminishes. The third will be still less and so on. The total utility increasing until the consumption of fourth unit of good but diminishing rate. Fifth unit of apple gives him maximum total utility. But marginal utility becomes zero. Further consumption of sixth unit TU diminishes and MU becomes negative.

The relationship between total utility and marginal utility is explained in the following three ways.

  1. When total utility increases at diminishing rate, marginal utility falls.
  2. When total utility is maximum, marginal utility becomes zero.
  3. When total utility decreases, marginal utility becomes negative.

This can be shown in the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 2
In the diagram on ‘X’ axis measures units of apples and OY axis measures total utility and marginal utility. TU curve represents total utility and MU curve represents marginal utility. TU curve is maximum at 5th unit where MU curve will become zero. TU curve slopes downwards from 6th unit, while MU will become negative.

Limitations or Exceptions :

  1. Hobbies: This law does not operate in the case of hobbies like collection of stamps, old paintings, coins etc. Greater the collections of a person, greater is his satisfaction. Marginal utility will not diminish.
  2. Drunkers : It is pointed out that the consumption of liquor is not subject to the law of diminishing marginal utility. The more a person drinks liquor, the more he likes it.
  3. Miser : This law does not apply to money. The more money a person has the greater is the desire to acquire still more of it.
  4. Further, this law does not hold good if any change in income of the consumer, tastes and preferences.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 2.
Critically examine the law of equi-marginal utility.
Answer:
Law of equi – marginal utility is an important law of consumption. It is called as “Gossen’s second law”, as its formulations is associated with the name of H.H.Gossen.

According to Marshall “If person has a thing which can be put to several uses, he will distribute it among these uses in such a way that it has the same marginal utility in all uses. If it had a greater marginal utility in one use than in another, he would gain by taking away some of it from the second and applying it to the first”.

According to this law the consumer has to distribute his money income on different uses in such a manner that the last rupee spent on each commodity gives him the same marginal utility. Equalisation of marginal utility in different uses will maximise his total satisfaction. Hence this law is known as the “Law of equi-marginal utility”.

The fundamental condition for consumer’s equilibrium can be explained in the following way.
\(\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{x}}}=\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{y}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{y}}}=\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{z}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{z}}}\) = MUm
Where MUx, MUy, MUz, MUm = Marginal utilities of commodities x, y, z, m;
Px, py, pz = Prices of X, y, z.
This law can be explained with the help of a table. Suppose the consumer is prepared to spend his money income is ₹ 26/- on two goods X and Y. Market prices of two goods are ₹ 4/- & ₹ 5/- respectively. Now the marginal utilities of good x & good y are shown below.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 3
For explaining consumer’s maximum satisfaction and consequent equilibrum position we need to reconstruct the above table by dividing marginal utilities of x by its price ₹ 4/- and marginal utility of y by ₹ 5/-. This is shown in the following table.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 4
In the table it is clear that when consumer purchase 4 units of goods x & 2 units of good y. Therefore, consumer will.be in equilibrium when he is spending (4 × 4 = 16 + 2 × 5 = 10) ₹ 26 on them.
Limitations of the law : The law of equi marginal utility has been subject to certain limitations which are as given below.

  1. The law assumes that consumer is a rational man and always tries to get maximum satisfaction. But it is not possible always to compare the utilities derived from different commodities.
  2. This law not applicable when goods are indivisible.
  3. The law is based on unrealistic assumptions like cardinal measurement of utility and marginal utility of money remains constant. In real world MU of money does not remain constant.
  4. This law will not be applicable to complementary goods.
  5. Another limitations of this law is that there is no fixed accounting period for the consumer in which he can buy and consume goods.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 3.
Explain consumer’s equilibrium with law of equi-marginal utility. [March 18]
Answer:
Law of equi-marginal utility is an important law of consumption. It is called as “Gossen’s with the name of H.H.Gossen. According to Marshall “If person has a thing which can be put to several uses, he will distribute it among these uses in such a way that it has the same marginal utility in all uses. If it had a greater marginal utility in one use than in another, he would gain by taking away some of it from the second and applying it to the first”.

According to this law the consumer has to distribute his money income on different uses in such a manner that the last rupee spent on each commodity gives him the same marginal utility. Equalisation of marginal utility in different uses will maximise his total satisfaction. Hence this law is known as “law of equi-marginal utility”.

Assumptions of the law : The law of equi-marginal utility depends on the following assumptions.

  1. This law is based on cardinal measurement of utility.
  2. Consumer is a national man always aiming at maximum satisfaction.
  3. The marginal utility of money remains constant.
  4. Consumer’s income is limited and he is proposed to spent the entire amount on different goods.
  5. The price of goods are unchanged.
  6. Utility derived from one commodity is independent of the utility of the other commodity.

The fundamental condition for consumer’s equilibrium can be explained in the following way.
\(\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{x}}}=\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{y}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{y}}}=\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{z}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{z}}}\) = MUm
Where MUx, MUy, MUx, MUm = marginal utility of commodities X, Y, Z, m;
Px, Py, Pz = prices of x, y, z.
This law can be explained with the help of a table. Suppose the consumer is prepared to spend his money income is ₹ 26/- on two goods x and y. Market prices of two goods are ₹ 4/- & ₹ 5/- respectively. Now the marginal utilities of goods x & y are shown below.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 5
For explaining consumer’s maximum satisfaction and consequent equilibrum position we need to reconstruct the above table by dividing marginal utilities of x its price ₹ 4/- and marginal utility of y by ₹ 5/-. This is shown in the following table.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 6
In the table it is clear that when consumer purchase 4 units of goods x & 2 units of good y. Therefore, consumer will be in equilibrium when he is spending (4 × 4 = 16 + 2 × 5 = 10) ₹ 26 on them.

Consumer’s equilibrium may be shown in the diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 7
Consumer’s equilibrium by using principle of equi-marginal utility

In the diagram marginal utility curves of goods slope downwards i.e. AB & CD taking of the income of the consumer as given, suppose his M>U of money constant at OE. \(\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{x}}}\) is equal to OE when OG quantity of good X is brought. \(\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{y}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{y}}}\) is equal to OE, when OF quantity of good y is purchased. Thus consumer purchasing OG of X and OF of Y. \(\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{x}}}=\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{y}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{y}}}\) = MUm. This is consumer’s equilibrium.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 4.
Explain the consumer’s equilibrium using indifference curve.
Answer:
The point where the consumer gets maximum possible satisfaction, where the budget line is tangent to the indifference curve and the MRS is equal to the price ratio of the two goods will be defined as equilibrium of the consumer.
Assumptions :

  1. Consumer scale of preferences must remain constant.
  2. Money income of thfe consumer must remain constant.
  3. The price of two goods must remain unchanged.
  4. There should be no change in the tastes and habits of the consumer.
  5. The consumer is rational and thus maximises his satisfaction.

Conditions of equilibrium : There are two conditions that must be satisifed for the consumer to be in equilibrium. They are :

  1. At the point of equilibrium, the budget / price line must be tangent to the indifference curve.
  2. At the point of equilibrium, the consumer’s MRSxy and the price ratio must be equal.
    i.e„ MRSxy = \(\frac{P_x}{P_y}\)

This can be shown in the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 8
In the diagram ‘AB’ is consumer’s budget or price line. IC, IC1, IC2 are indifference curves. In the diagram the consumer is equilibrium OM of x and ON of y. At point E the price line touches to an IC1. At point ‘S’ consumer will be on ‘O’ lower indifference curve IC and will be getting less satisfaction than at E on IC. IC2 is beyond the capacity of consumer. So it is outside to the budget line.

Question 5.
Define price line / budget line and explain shifts in the budget line.
Answer:
The budget line or price line shows all possible combinations of two goods that a consumer can buy with the given income of the consumer and prices of the two goods.

The concept of budget / price line will be shown in the following example. Suppose that a consumer has ₹ 150 (income) to buy two goods namely X and Y. Whose prices are ₹ 15 and ₹ 30 each. With the given information now we can draw the budget or price line as shown in the diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 9
In the above diagram ‘AB’ is the ‘budget or price line’. The slope of the line AB represents the ratio of the prices of X and Y in such a manner that 10 of x will be equal to 5 of y.

Shifts in the Budget line : The position of the budget line depends upon size of money income of the consumer. If his income increase and the price of the two commodities remaining the same, the consumer can buy more of both the commodities. On the other hand, if his income decreases, the prices of the two commodities remaining the same the consumer now to reduce his purchase. As a result of changes in the consumer income, there will be shifts in budget line also. The same is shown in the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 10

  1. When the income of the consumer increase, the budget line moves towards right from the original to AB to A’B’.
  2. When the income of the consumer decrease, the budget line moves to the left from the original / initial AB to A”B”.

Change in price line : The slope of the price line depends on the prices of both the commodities there will be a change in the slope of the price line when there is a change in the price or either of the two commodities.
i) Suppose that the price of ‘X’ falls, while the price of Y and money income of the consumer remaining the same.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 11
In the above diagram, the initial price line of AB, before change in the price of X’. Suppose that the price of X’ has fallen and the price of ‘Y’ remaining the same.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

ii) Suppose that the price Y falls, while the price of X and money income of the consumer re-maining the same.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 12
In the above diagram, the initial line is AB that is before a change in price of Y.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Difference between cardinal and ordinal utility.
Answer:
The concept of utility was introduce by Benham in 1789. Utility means want satisfying power of a commodity. It is a psychological phenomenon. The measurement of utility, there are two different approaches.

  1. Cardinal utility
  2. Ordinal utility

1) Cardinal utility : This approach was developed by Alfred Marshall. According to him utility is psychological concept. So it can be measured ‘util’. The numbers 1, 2, 3, 4 etc are cardinal numbers. According to this analysis the utilities derived from consumption of different commodities can be measured in terms of arbitary units, such as 1, 2, 3 … and so on.

2) Ordinal utility : This approach was developed by R.J.D. Allen and J.R.Hicks. According to them utility is psychological concept. So we cannot measure in numerically much less compared. The numbers 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th etc., are ordinal numbers. The ordinal numbers are ranked. It means the utilities obtained by the consumer from different goods can be arranged in a serial order such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th etc.

Question 2.
Properties of IC (Indifference curves). [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
The important properties of indifference curves are :

  1. Indifference curves slopes downwards from left to right there exists negative slope.
  2. Indifference curves are convex to the origin because of diminishing marginal rate of substitution.
  3. Indifference curves can never intersect each other.
  4. Higher indifference curve represent higher level of satisfaction. Indifference curve to the right represents higher satisfaction.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 3.
Marginal Rate of Substitution
Answer:
The concept of MRS (Marginal Rate of Substitution) is the basis of indifference curves. The MRS may be defined as the rate at which an individual will exchange successive unity of one commodity for another. This can be explained with the help of following example.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 13
From the table it is clear that consumer has 15 units of good Y and 1 of good X, he is willing to forego 4Y for IX. Here marginal rate of substitution of X for Y is 4 :1 and for 3rd combination it is 3 : 1 and so on. The MRS xy diminishes as the consumer goes on substituting X for Y.
MRSxy = \(\frac{\Delta Y}{\Delta X}\)

Question 4.
Indifference Map
Answer:
A set of indifference curves drawn for different income levels is called as “indifference map”. In other words indifference map is the locus of various indifference curves various levels of satisfaction to the consumer.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 14
From the above diagram it is clear that an indifference map of IC1, IC2, IC2. Each curve shows a certain level of satisfaction to the consumer: The different indifference curves are always arranged and numbered in ascending order.

As are moves from IC1 to IC3 on an indifference map, the IC labelled higher number (IC3) is preferred to the IC labelled lower number (IC1).

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 5.
Price Line.
Answer:
The budget / price line shows all possible combinations of two goods that a consumer can buy, with given income of the consumer and prices of the two goods. But which particular combination of two goods on IC he can get depends on two factors.

  1. Consumer’s money income
  2. Prices of two goods.

The concept of budget / price line will be shown in the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 15
In the above diagram PL is Budget line. If consumer spend his total income on good X, he could get L. Any point outside the given price line H will beyond the capacity of consumer, K is under spending Capacity.

The concept of price line or budget line can be known the following example. Suppose the consumer has ₹ 5/- to buy two goods say X and Y prices of X and Y are ₹ 1/- and 0.50 paisa. Then the following are the opportunities available before him.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 16

  1. If consumer spends his total amount of ₹ 5 on X only he gets 5 units of X and none of Y.
  2. If he spends whole of his money i.e., ₹ 5 on Y only he gets 10 units of Y and none of X.
  3. If consumer wants to have both X & Y. Therefore he can move within OAB of price line.

Additional Questions

Question 6.
Explain the importance of law of equi-marginal utility.
Answer:
The law of equi-marginal utility states that a consumer will be in equilibrium when the marginal utility of the various commodity are equal.
Importance :

  1. Basis of consumer expenditure : It is basis for consumers expenditure and guide the consumers while allocating resources.
  2. In the field of production : This law is useful to the producer and it explains how a producer maximises his profits and reduces cost of production.
  3. Exchange : In all our exchanges, this law works, for exchange is nothing but substitution of one thing for another.
  4. Public Finance : This law helps the government in the allocation of scarce resources and also the government levied taxes on the basis of this principle.
  5. Price determination : This principle has an important bearing on the determination of value.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 7.
Explain superiority of the indifference curve technique.
Answer:

  1. It is an analysis of multi-goods model.
  2. It does not assume marginal utility of money remains constant.
  3. It analyses income effect, price effect and substitution effect.
  4. The assumption of ordinal measurement of utility made by indifference curve is less restrictive and more realistic.

Question 8.
What are the important assumptions of indifference techniques ?
Answer:
An indifference curve represents satisfaction of a consumer from two commodities. An IC curve can defined as the locus of points each representing a different combination of two goods yielding the same level of satisfaction.
Assumptions :

  1. Rationality: It is assumed that the consumer tries to obtain maximum satisfaction from his expenditure.
  2. Scale of preference : Consumer is able to arrange the available combinations of goods according to scale of preference.
  3. Ordinal utility : It assumes ordinal utility approach. So utility measurable only ordinal terms i.e., 1st, 2nd, 3rd ………… etc.
  4. Diminishing marginal rate of substitution : It is the rate at which a consumer is willing to substitute commodity to another. So that this satisfaction remains the same.
  5. Consistency : Consumer’s choices have to consistent. It means if consumer prefers A to B and B to C his choice reflects his rationality.
  6. Completeness : The consumer’s scale of preferences is to complete that he is able to choose any one of the two combinations of commodities presented to him.

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Utility
Answer:
The want satisfying power or capacity of a commodity or service is known as utility. It is the basis of consumer’s demand for a commodity.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 2.
Cardinal utility [March 17]
Answer:
Alfred Marshall developed cardinal utility analysis. According to this analysis the utilities derived from consumption of different commodities can be measured in terms of arbitary units called utils. 1, 2, 3, 4 are called cardinal numbers.

Question 3.
Ordinal utility
Answer:
This was developed by J.R.Hicks, Allen. Utility is subjective and measurement of utility in numerical terms is not possible. We can observe the preference one for a good more than for another. Ordinal numbers such as 1st, 2nd, 3rd ………….. etc. The ordinal numbers are ranked.

Question 4.
Scale of preferences
Answer:
Guides the consumer in his purchases. It reflects his tastes and preferences.

Question 5.
Price Line [March 16]
Answer:
It shows all possible combinations of two goods that a consumer can buy, with the given income of the consumer’s and prices of the two goods.

Question 6.
MRS
Answer:
The additional amount of one product required to compensate a consumer for a small decrease in the quantity of another, per unit of the decrease.

Additional Questions

Question 7.
Total utility
Answer:
Total utility is the total amount of utility which a consumer derives from a given stock of a commodity.
TUn = f(Qn)

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 8.
Marginal utility
Answer:
Marginal utility is the additional utility obtained from the consumption of additional unit of the commodity.
MUn = TUn – TU(n-1)
(or)
MU = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{TU}}{\Delta \mathrm{Q}}\)

Question 9.
Consumers equilibrium
Answer:
The term equilibrium implies a position of rest or changelessness. A consumer attains equilibrium only when he secures maximum satisfaction out of his expenditure. In distributing a commodity various uses, the consumer will secure maximum satisfaction if the marginal utility of the commodity equalised in all its uses.
\(\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{x}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{x}}}=\frac{\mathrm{MU}_{\mathrm{y}}}{\mathrm{P}_{\mathrm{y}}}\) ………… and ao on.

Question 10.
Indifference curve
Answer:
It represents the satisfaction of a consumer from two goods of various combinations. It is drawn on the assumption that for all possible combinations of the two goods on an indifference curve, the satisfaction level remains the same.

Question 11.
Iso-utility curve
Answer:
Iso-utility curve is also known as indifference curve or the curve of equal utility. The situation where consumers yield the same level of total satisfaction at various combinations of the commodities called Iso-utility curve.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour

Question 12.
Indifference schedule
Answer:
It is a table representing the various combinations of goods which give equal satisfaction to the consumer. An indifference curve is drawn on the basis of an “indifference schedule”.

Question 13.
Indifference map
Answer:
A set of indifference curves drawn for different income levels is called indifference map.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 2 Theory of Consumers Behaviour 17
From the above diagram it is clear that an indifference map of IC1, IC2, IC3. Each curve shows a certain level of satisfaction to the consumer.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 1st Lesson Introduction Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material 1st Lesson Introduction

Essay Questions

Question 1.
Discuss Wealth definition.
Answer:
Adam Smith was the first person to give a precise definition of Economics and separate this study from other social sciences. Adam Smith is considered as ‘Father of Economics’. He defined it in his famous book Wealth of Nations’, as “An enquiry into the nature and causes of wealth of nations”. Most of the economists in the 19th century held this view.

J.B. Say states that “The aim of political economy is to show the way in which wealth is produced, distributed and consumed”. The other economists who supported this definition are J.B. Say, J.S.Mill, Walker and others.
The main features of Wealth definition :

  1. Acquisition of wealth is considered as the main objective of human activity.
  2. Wealth means material things.
  3. Human beings are guided by self-interest, whose objective is to accumulate more and more wealth.

Criticism : The wealth definition was severely criticised by many writers due to its defects.

  1. Economists like Carlyled and Ruskin pointed out that economics must discuss ordinary man’s activities. So they called it as a ‘Dismal Science’.
  2. Adam Smith’s definition, wealth was considered to consist of only material things and services are not included. Due to this the scope of economics is limited.
  3. Marshall pointed out wealth is only a means to an end but not an end in itself.
  4. This definition concentrated mainly on the production side and neglected distributed side.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 2.
Explain Welfare definition.
Answer:
Alfred Marshall tried to remedy the defects of wealth definition in 1890. He shifted emphasis from production of wealth to distribution of wealth.

According to Marshall “Political economy or Economics is a study of mankind in the : ordinary business of life. It examines that part of individual and social action which is most closely connected with the attainment and with the use of material requisites of well-being. Thus Economics is on one side, a study of wealth and on the other and more important side, a part of study of man”.

Edwin Cannan defined it as “The aim of political economy is the explanation of the general causes on which the material welfare of human beings depends”.

In the words of Pigou “The range of enquiry becomes restricted to that part of social welfare that can be brought directly or indirectly into relation with the measuring rod of money”.

The main features of Welfare definition :

  1. Economics as a social science is concerned with man’s ordinary business of life.
  2. Economics studies only economic aspects of human life and it has no concern with the social, political and religious aspects of human life. It examines that part of individual and social action which is closely connected with acquisition and use of material wealth for promotion of human welfare.
  3. According to Marshall, the activities which contribute to material welfare are considered as economic activities.
  4. He gave primary importance to man and his welfare and to wealth as means for the promotion of human welfare.

Criticism:

  1. Robbins criticised Marshall’s economics is a ‘social science’ rather than a human science, which includes the study of actions of every human being.
  2. Marshall’s definition mainly concentrated on the welfare derived from material things only. But non – materialistic goods which are also’ very important for the well being of the people. Hence, it is incomplete.
  3. Critics pointed out that quantitative measurement of welfare is not possible. Welfare is a subjective concept and changes according to time, place and persons.
  4. According to Marshall, economics deals with those activities of men which will promote human welfare. But production of alcohol and drugs do not promote human welfare. Hence the scope of economics is limited.
  5. Another important criticism is that it is not concerned with the fundamental problem of scarcity of resources.
  6. According to Robbins the economic problem arises due to unlimited wants and limited resources. These factors are ignored in this definition.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 3.
Explain how Robbings definition is superior to the welfare definition.
Answer:
Lionel Robbin’s of London School of Economics introduced the ‘Scarcity’ definition of Economics, in his book.

‘An Essay on the nature and significance of Economic Science’.

According to Robbin’s “Economics is the science which studies human behaviour as a relationship between ends and scarce means which have alternative uses”. Scarcity of resources is the central idea in Robbin’s definition.
Main features of Robbin’s definition :

  1. Unlimited wants or ends
  2. Means are scarce or limited
  3. Means have alternative uses
  4. Problem of choice.

Welfare definition: According to Marshall “Economics is on one side a study of wealth and on the other and more important side a part of study of man.” Marshall in his definition gave more importance to man than wealth.

Marshall defined “Political economy or Economics is a study of mankind in the ordinary business of life, it examines that part of individual and social action which is most closely connected with the attainment and with the use of the material requisites of well-being.

Main features of welfare definition :

  1. He assumed that Economics must be a science which is study of man kind in the ordinary business of life.
  2. Economics is concerned with real man influenced by human considerations and it has no concern with the political, social and religious aspects of life.
  3. Wealth is a means for promoting human welfare, i 4) The main emphasis of Marshall is on material welfare and the immaterial aspects are ignored.

Superiority of Robbin’s definition over Marshall’s definition :

  1. According to Marshall “Economics Studies the activities of those people who live in society”. But Robbin’s says that Economics studies, all human activities whether they promote human welfare or not.
  2. According to Marshall “The scope of Economics is limited. But Robbin’s the scope of Economics is wide”.
  3. Robbin’s definition has universal applicability. Because it is applicable to all types of societies.
  4. Robbin’s definition of Economics is neutral between ends. He made economics a positive science. It does not pass value judgements.

Question 4.
Define Prof. Samuelson’s growth definition.
Answer:
Robbin’s definition does not take into consideration the dynamic problem of economic growth. As the time passes the scarcity of means ends, targets choices undergo a change. The inherent defect of Robbins definition has been rectified by Paul Samuelson in his definition of Economics.

Prof. Paul Samuelson, a Nobel Prize winner of 1970 provided a new definition of economics in which he introduced time element and it is dynamic in nature. Therefore his definition is known as growth oriented definition.

According to Samuelson “Economics is the study of how people and society choosing with or without the use of money, to employ scarce productive resources that could have alternative use to produce various commodities and distribute them for consumption. Now or in the future among various persons and groups in society.
Important features of the definition :

  1. Scarcity : Like Robbins, Samuelson emphasises the scarcity of resources, unlimited wants and the alternative uses for the means.
  2. Dynamism : Samuelson’s definition is dynamic. He talks about production, distribution and consumption in the present and also in the future.
  3. Wide Scope : This definition widen the scope of Economics. It deals with problems of choice in a dynamic society.
  4. Economic growth : He gave importance to economic growth the future consumption is safeguard by productive investment which leads to economic growth.

Thus Samuelson definition of economics is considered to be the most satisfactory definition of economics as it clearly states.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 5.
Distinguish between “Micro” and “Macro Economics”.
Answer:
Modem economic theory divided it into two branches, namely (i) Micro Economics (ii) Macro Economics. Ragnar Frisch was the first economist to use the words “Micro and Macro” in economic theory in 1930.

Micro Economics : The term “Micro Economics” is derived from the Greek word MIKROS’ which means small. Thus micro economics is the theory of small. It was developed by classical economists like Adam Smith, J.B.Say, J.S.Mill, Ricardo, Marshall etc. It studies about individual units or behaviour of that particular units like individual income, price, demand etc. Micro Economics is also known as partial analysis. If main, concentrates on the determination of prices of commodities and factors of production. It is also known as “Price theory”. According to K.E. Boulding Micro Economics is the study of particular firms, particular households, individual prices, wages, incomes individual industries and particular commodities.

Shapiro says “Micro Economics has got relation with small segments of the society.
Macro Economics : The term Macro Economics is derived from the Greek word ‘MAKROS’ which means large. Thus Macro Economics is the study of economic system as a whole. It was developed by J.M. Keynes. It studies aggregates in the economy like national income, total consumption, total saving and total employment etc. It is also known as Income and Employment theory.

According to Boulding “Macro Economics studies National Income not Individual income, general price level instead of individual prices and national output instead of individual output. Macro Economics also studies the economic problems like poverty, unemployment, economic growth, development etc. It is also deals with the theory of distribution.

The difference between Micro Econoinics and Macro Economics : Micro and Macro Economics are interrelated to each other. Inspite of close relationship between the two branches of economics, fundamentally they differ from each other.

Micro Economics

  1. The word micro derived from the greek word ‘ Mikros’ means “small”.
  2. Micro Economics is the study of individual units of the economy.
  3. It is known as Price theory.
  4. Micro Economics explains price determination both commodity and factor markets.
  5. Micro Economics is based on price mechanism which depends on demand and supply.

Macro Economics

  1. The word macro derived from the greek word ‘Makros’ which means large”.
  2. Macro Economics is the study of economy as a whole.
  3. It is known as Income and Employment theory.
  4. Macro Economics deals with national income, total employment, general price level and economic growth.
  5. Macro Economics based on aggregate demand. and aggregate supply.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Free goods and Economic goods.
Answer:
Free goods

  1. Free goods are nature’s gift.
    Ex : Air, Sunshine etc.
  2. Their supply is abundant.
  3. They do not have price.
  4. These goods don’t have cost of production.
  5. Free goods have only value in use.
  6. These goods are not included in National Income.

Economic goods

  1. Economic goods are man made.
    Ex: Book, Pen etc.
  2. Supply is always less than their demand.
  3. These goods command price.
  4. Economic goods have cost of production.
  5. Economic goods have both use value and exchange value.
  6. Economic goods are included in National Income.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 2.
Characteristics of Wants. [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
Human wants are starting point of all economic activities. They depend on social and economic conditions of individuals.
Characteristic features of wants :
1) Unlimited wants : Human wants are unlimited. There is no end to human wants. When one want is satisfied another want takes its place. Wants differ from person to person, time to time and place to place.

2) A particular want is satiable : Although a man cannot satisfy all his wants, a particular want can be satisfied completely in a period of time.
Ex: If a person is thirsty he can satisfy it by drinking a glass of water.

3) Competition : Human wants unlimited. But the means to satisfy them are limited of scarce. Therefore they complete with each other in priority of satisfaction.

4) Complementary: To satisfy a particular want we need a group of commodities at the same time.
Ex: Writing need is satisfied only when we have pen, ink and paper together.

5) Substitution : Most of our wants can be satisfied by different ways.
Ex : If we feel hungry, we take some food and satisfy this want.

6) Recurring : Many wants appear again and again thought they are satisfied at one point of time.

7) Habits : Wants change into habits, which cannot be given up easily.
Ex : Smoking cigarettes for joke results into a habit if it is not controlled.

8) Wants vary with time, place and person : Wants go on changing with the passage of time. They are changing from time to time, place to place and person to person. Human wants are divided into 1. Necessities, 2. Comforts and 3. Luxuries.

Question 3.
Various types of utility.
Answer:
The want satisfying capacity of a commodity at a point of time is known as utility.
Types of utility:
1) Form utility: Form utilities are created by changing the shape, size and colour etc., of a commodity so as to increase its want satisfying power.
Ex : Conversion of a wooden log into a chair.

2) Place utility : By changing the place some goods acquire utility.
Ex : Sand on the sea shore has no utility. If it is brought out and transported to market, it gains utility. This is place utility.

3) Time utility : Time utilities are created by storage facility.
Ex : Business men store food grains in the stock points in the off season and releases them to markets to meet high demand and obtained super normal profits.

4) Service utility : Services also have the capacity to satisfy human wants.
Ex: Services of Lawyer, Teacher, Doctor etc. These services directly satisfy human wants.
Hence they are called as service utilities.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 4.
Jacob Viner’s definition. [March 18, 17, 16]
Answer:
Jacob Viner’s-definition of Economics is considered as modem definition of Economics. He is an American economist known for his short run and longrun cost curve analysis. According to Jacob Yiner “Economics is what economists do”.
The problems of the economy are :

  1. What to produce and in what quantities : The economy has to decide whether to produce consumer goods and capital goods. These decisions are influence by individuals as well as government.
  2. How to produce these goods : A decision has to be made whether to use labour intensive or capital intensive techniques.
  3. For whom to produce these goods and services: It is concerned with the distribution of income and wealth among different sections of the society.
  4. How efficient the productive resources are in use : This refers to the efficiency of economic system.
  5. Whether the available resources are fully utilised : If resources are fully utilised that it can provide more employment opportunities.
  6. Is the economy growing or static over a period of time.

Question 5.
Various economic investigations.
Answer:
According to Peterson “The term method refers to the techniques and producers used by economists for both construction and verification economic principles. There are plainly two methods used by the economists for conducting economic investigations. They are :

  1. Deductive method
  2. Inductive method.

1. Deductive method : This method is also known as the analytical and abstract method. The method of studying phenomenon by taking same assumptions and deducing conclusions from those assumptions is known as the deductive method. It proceeds from general to the particular or from universal to the individual. This was advocated by economists belonging to the classical school. There are four steps involved in drawing inference through deductive method. They are :

  1. Selecting the problem
  2. Formulating assumptions
  3. Formulating hypothesis
  4. Verifying the hypothesis.

The law of diminishing marginal utility is one law derived using this deductive method.
Merits of deduction:

  1. It is less expensive and less time consuming.
  2. It analyses complex economic phenomena and bring exactness to economic generalizations.
  3. It helps in laying down basic principles of human behaviour.

Inspite of the above stated advantages, it is not free from limitations. It is based on unrealistic assumptions with little empirical content.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

2. Inductive method : This method is also known as Historical, Empirical, Concrete, Ethical or Realistic. This method was strongly advocated and made use of by economists belonging to the historical school. This method proceeds from a part to the whole from particular to general or from the individual to the universal.
The following are the important steps involved in deriving economic generalisations through inductive method.

  1. Selection of the problem
  2. Collection of data
  3. Observation
  4. Generalisation

Merits of induction method :

  1. It is nearer to reality and therefore expected to depict reality.
  2. This method involves less chances of mistakes.

Inspite of several advantages it has its own defects. This method is expensive and consuming. It can be used by those who possess skill and competance in handling ex data.

Additional Questions

Question 6.
What is meant by Micro Economics ? Discuss its importance.
Answer:
The tehn ‘Micro Economics’ is derived from the greek word ‘MIKROS’ which means ‘small’. Thus Micro Economics deals with individual units like individual demand, price, supply etc. It was popularised by Marshall. It is also called as ‘Price Theory’ because it explains pricing in product market as well as factor market.
Importance :

  1. Micro Economics provides the basis for understanding the working of the economy as a whole.
  2. This study is useful to the government to frame suitable policies to active economic growth and stability.
  3. This study is applicable to the field of international trade in the determination of exchange rates.
  4. Micro Economics provides an analytical tool for evaluating the economic policies of the government.
  5. It can be used to examine the condition of economic welfare and it suggests ways and means to bring about maximum social welfare.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 7.
What is meant by Macro Economics ? Discuss its importance.
Answer:
The term Macro Economics is derived from the greek word ‘MAKROS’ which means large. It was developed by j.M.Keynes. Macro Economics deals with economic system as a while like national income, aggregate demand, aggregate supply, general price level etc. It is also known as ‘Income and Employment’ theory.
Importance :

  1. Macro Economics study is more useful to the government for formulation and execution of policies for achievement of maximum social benefit.
  2. It helps in understanding the problems of unemployment poverty, inflation etc, and suggests has to solve them.
  3. It gives us a picture of the working of the economy as a whole;
  4. The study of Macro Economics is helpful in analysing the causes of business cycles and in providing-remedies.
  5. Macro Economics includes economic growth and suggests how developing countries can use their resources to maximise their growth.
  6. Macro Economic study is useful for making international comparisons in terms of average national income.

Question 8.
Explain the circular flow of income with suitable diagram.
Answer:
Income is a flow over a period of time. Income flow is of circular in character. Where beginning and end cannot be traced. National output originates in private and public sectors. It moves to the households. The household is the basic consuming unit in economic life. In every economy income flows from households to firms and vice versa. Thus the factor market and the product market are closely related to each other.

The circular flow of income can be explained with the help of the following diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction 1
According to the above diagram, it is clear that the factor market and commodity market are closely related to one another.

The households supply the resource services and receives in returm payment interms of money. Thus money flows from producing units to households. The household exchange that money for goods and services they want. As a result the money flows from households to firms. Thus there is a circular flow of income and output.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 9.
Explain the differences between Consumer goods and Capital goods.
Answer:
Anything that can satisfy a human want is called a good. Goods can be classified into two types namely,

  1. Free goods
  2. Economic goods.

Further the economic goods divided into two types namely :

  1. Consumer goods
  2. Capital goods or Producer goods.

1) Consumer goods: A consumer good is an economic good or commodity purchased by households for final consumption. Thus these goods satisfy human wants directly.
Ex : Foods, books etc.
Consumer goods further divided into two types.
a) Perishable goods
b) Durable goods
a) Perishable goods : They lose their value in single use.
Ex : Milk, fruits etc.
b) Durable goods: These goods which yields service over period of time. Hence utility from these goods can be derive’d for a long time.
Ex : T.Vs & Computers.

2) Producer or Capital goods: Goods which are used in the production of other goods -lied producer or capital goods. They satisfy human wants indirectly.
Ex : Machines, buildings etc.
Differences between Consumer goods and Capital goods.
Consumer goods

  1. These goods satisfy human wants directly. Ex: Milk, fruits etc.
  2. They have direct demand.
  3. These are the goods of first order.
  4. They are net used in the production process of other goods.
  5. They yield utility to the owners of these goods.

Capital goods

  1. These goods satisfy human wants indirectly. Ex: Machines, raw-materials.
  2. They have indirect or derived demand.
  3. These are the goods of second order.
  4. These are used in the production process of other goods.
  5. They yield income to the owners of these goods.

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Economic goods
Answer:
Economic goods are man-made, they have cost of production and price. They are limited in supply. They have both value in use and value in exchange.
Ex : Pen, Book etc.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 2.
Capital goods
Answer:
Goods which are used in the production of other goods are called producer or capital goods. They satisfy human wants indirectly.
Ex : Machines, tools, buildings etc.

Question 3.
Intermediary goods [March 17]
Answer:
Goods which are under the process of production and semi finished goods are known as intermediary goods.
Ex : Cotton and fibre etc.

Question 4.
Wealth [March 18, 16]
Answer:
Wealth means stock of assets held by an individual or institution that yields has the potential for yielding income in some form. Wealth includes money, shares of companies, land etc. Wealth has three properties. 1. Utility 2. Scarcity 3. Transferability

Question 5.
Income
Ans. Income is a flow of satisfaction from wealth per unit of time. In every economy income’ flows from households to firms and vice versa. Income can be expressed in two types.

  1. Money income which is in terms of money.
  2. Real income which is in terms of goods and services.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 6.
Utility [March 16]
Answer:
Utility is the wants satisfying capacity of goods and services. It is a subjective concept. No one can measure it in mathematical terms.

Question 7.
Exchange value
Answer:
Exchange value is the purchasing power of one commodity to another. All economic goods have exchange value.

Question 8.
Price [March 18, 17]
Answer:
The price of anything is its value measured in terms of money.
Ex: A commodity is exchanged for 50 rupees then the price of commodity is 50 rupees.

Question 9.
Choice problem
Answer:
The choice problem is the central problem of Economics. The problems of the economy “What to produce ? How to produce” ? The problem of choice between commodities and the problem of choice of production techniques respectively.

Question 10.
Deductive Method
Answer:
Deductive method is the process from general to particular or from the universal to the individual.

Question 11.
Inductive method
Answer:
It is the process from particular to general or from the individual to the universal.
Economic statistics : It refers to the functional relationship between the two variables whose values are related to the same point. This concept was introduced by J.S. Mill.

AP Inter 1st Year Economics Study Material Chapter 1 Introduction

Question 13.
Economic dynamics
Answer:
J.S. Mill introduced this concept in Economics. It refers to the analysis where the functional relationship is established between relevant variables whose values belong to different point of time.

Question 14.
Partial equilibrium
Answer:
It was popularised by Marshall. It exists when an equilibrium relates to a single variable.

Question 15.
General equilibrium
Answer:
This concept was popularised by Leon Walras. General equilibrium exists when an equilibrium relates to number of variables or even the economy as a whole.

Question 16.
Micro Economics
Ans. The word ‘Micro’ derived from Greek word ‘Mikros’ which means ‘small’. It was developed by Marshall. It is the study of the individual units like individual demand, price, supply etc.

Question 17.
Macro Economics
Answer:
The word ‘Macro’ derived from Greek word ‘Makros’ which means large. It was developed by J.M. Keynes. It studies aggregates or economy as a whole like national income, employment, general price level etc. It is also called “Income and Employment” theory.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 14th Lesson Kinetic Theory Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 14th Lesson Kinetic Theory

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define mean free path. [A.P. Mar. 18, 17, 15; T.S. Mar. 17, 15]
Answer:
The average distance covered by a molecule between two successive collisions is called the mean free path.

Question 2.
How does kinetic theory justify Avogadro’s hypothesis and show that Avogadro’s Number in different gases is the same?
Answer:
For two different gases, we have \(\frac{P_1 V_1}{N_1 T_1}=\frac{P_2 V_2}{N_2 T_2}\) = KB (constant)
If P, V, T are the same, then N is also the same for the two gases.
N is called Avogadro’s number. According to Avogadro’s hypothesis, the number of molecules per unit volume is the same for all gases at a fixed temperature and pressure.
In this way, kinetic theory justify Avogadro’s hypothesis.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 3.
When does a real gas behave like an ideal gas ? [T.S. Mar. 16; Mar. 14]
Answer:
At low pressures and high temperatures real gases behave like an ideal gas.

Question 4.
State Boyle’s Law and Charle’s Law. [A.P. Mar. 18; T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Boyle’s law : At constant temperature, the pressure of a given mass of gas varies inversely with volume.
Charle’s law: At constant pressure, the volume of the gas is proportional to its absolute temperature.

Question 5.
State Dalton’s law of partial pressures. [T.S. Mar. 18; A.P. Mar. 16; Mar. 14]
Answer:
The total pressure exerted by a mixture of non-reacting gases occupying a vessel is equal to the sum of the individual pressures which each gas would exert if it is alone occupied the whole vessel.
i.e., P = P1 + P2 + ………….

Question 6.
Pressure of an ideal gas in container is independent of shape of the container – explain. [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:
The kinetic theory expression for the pressure of a given mass of an ideal gas in a container is 1 -2.
P = \(\frac{1}{3}\) nm\(\bar{v}^2\), where \(\overline{\mathrm{V}}\) indicates mean-square-speed, n is number of molecules, m is mass of molecule. From the above equation, shape of the container is immeterial. Hence pressure of an ideal gas is independent of shape of the container.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 7.
Explain the concept of degrees of freedom for molecules of a gas.
Answer:
The degrees of freedom of a particle indicate the number of independent motions which the particle can undergo, or the number of independent methods of exchanging energy.

A monoatomic molecule (He) has three degrees of freedom, a diatomic (H2, O2) one has five, while a triatomic (H2O) one has six.

Question 8.
What is the expression between pressure and kinetic energy of a gas molecules ? [AP – Mar. ’17, ’16, ’15]
Answer:
By kinetic theory pressure, P = \(\frac{1}{3} m n \overline{V}^2\) and kinetic energy = \(\frac{1}{2} m n \overline{V}^2\) where m is the mass of the molecules, n is the number of moles per unit volume, v is the mean-square-speed.
∴ P = \(\frac{2}{3}\left(\frac{1}{2} m n \overline{V}^2\right)\) = \(\frac{2}{3}\) (kineticenergy)

Question 9.
The absolute temperature of a gas is increased 3 times. What will be the increase in rms velocity of the gas molecule ?
Answer:
Case (i) : The r.m.s velocity of gas molecule, \(\overline{V}_1=\sqrt{\frac{3 R T_1}{M}}\)
Case (ii) : The r.m.s velocity of gas molecule, \(\overline{V}_2=\sqrt{\frac{3 R T_2}{M}}\)
\(\frac{\overline{\mathrm{V}}_2}{\overline{\mathrm{V}}_1}=\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{T}_2}{\mathrm{~T}_1}}=\sqrt{\frac{3 \mathrm{~T}_1}{\mathrm{~T}_1}}\)  [∵ T2 = 3T1] ⇒ \(\overline{\mathrm{V}}_2=\sqrt{3} \overline{\mathrm{V}}_1=1.732 \overline{\mathrm{V}}_1\)
∴ Increase in r.m.s velocity of gas molecule = \(\overline{\mathrm{V}}_2-\overline{\mathrm{V}}_1=1.732 \overline{\mathrm{V}}_1-\overline{\mathrm{V}}_1=0.732 \overline{\mathrm{V}}_1\)

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain the kinetic interpretation of Temperature.
Answer:
Kinetic interpretation of Temperature : Since the pressure of the gas is given by
P = \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{mn} \overline{\mathrm{V}}^2\), where m = mass of the gas, n = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = Number of molecules per unit volume
\(\overline{V}\) = r.m.s velocity of gas, P = \(\frac{1}{3} m \frac{N}{V} \overline{V}^2\) ⇒ PV = \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{mN} \overline{\mathrm{V}}^2\)
Also for a gram molecule of the gas, PV = RT
Hence RT = \(\frac{1}{3} m N \overline{V}^2 \Rightarrow 3 \frac{R T}{N}=m \overline{V}^2 \text { or } \frac{1}{2} m \overline{V}^2=\frac{3}{2} K_B T\) [∵ \(\frac{R}{N}\) = KB]
Here KB is Boltzman constant. So mean kinetic energy of a molecule is \(\frac{3}{2}\) KB T, which depends upon the temperature. As temperature increases mean kinetic energy of the molecules also increases.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 2.
How specific heat capacity of mono atomic, diatomic and poly atomic gases can be explained on the basis of Law of equipartition of Energy ? [Mar. 13]
Answer:
Specific heat capacity:
1) Mono atomic gases : According to law of equipartition of energy, a molecule of mono atomic gas has only 3 (translational) degrees of freedom, i.e., f = 3.
The molar specific heat of the gas at constant volume is given by Cv = \(\frac{f}{2}\) R where f is degree of freedom.
∴ Cv = \(\frac{3}{2}\)R = 3 cal/mole k [∵ R = 2 cal/mole – k]
The molar specific heat at constant pressure is given by
Cp = (\(\frac{f}{2}\) + 1)R = (\(\frac{3}{2}\) + 1) R = \(\frac{5}{2}\)R = 5 cal/ m0le – k

2) Diatomic gases : A molecule of diatomic gas has 5 degrees of freedom, 3 translational and 2 rotational i.e., f = 5
Therefore Cv = \(\frac{f}{2}\) R = \(\frac{5}{2}\)R = 5 cal/mole – k, Cp = (\(\frac{f}{2}\) + 1) R = \(\frac{7}{2}\) R = 7 cal/mole – k

3) Polyatomic gases : Polyatomic molecule has 3 translational, 3 rotational degrees of freedom, i. e., f = 6
Therefore Cv = \(\frac{f}{2}\)R = 3R = 6 cal / mole – k, Cp = (\(\frac{f}{2}\) + 1) = 4R = 8 cal / mole – k.

Question 3.
Explain the concept of absolute zero of temperature on the basis of kinetic theory.
Answer:
Concept of absolute zero on the basis of kinetic theory :
Since the pressure of the gas is given by
P = \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{mn} \overline{\mathrm{V}}^2\), where m = mass of the gas, n = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = number of molecules per unit volume.
V = r.m.s velocity of gas, P = \(\frac{1}{3} \frac{\mathrm{mN}}{\overline{\mathrm{V}}} \overline{\mathrm{V}}^2\) ⇒ PV = \(\frac{1}{3} m N \overline{V}^2\)
Also for a gram molecule of the gas, PV = RT
Hence RT = \(\frac{1}{3} M \overline{V}^2\) [∵ M = mN = molecular weight]
\(\overline{\mathrm{V}}^2=\frac{3 R T}{M}\)
∴ \(\overline{v}=\sqrt{\frac{3 R T}{M}}\)
Putting T = 0 in the above equation \(\overline{\mathrm{V}}\) = 0. Hence pressure becomes zero. Then the gas converts into liquids. Thus, this temperature is called absolute zero.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 4.
Prove that the average kinetic energy of a molecule of an ideal gas is directly proportional to the absolute temperature of the gas.
Answer:
Since the pressure of the gas is given by
P = \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{mn} \overline{\mathrm{V}}^2\), where m = mass of the gas, n = \(\frac{\mathrm{N}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = number of molecules per unit volume
\(\) = r.m.s velocity of gas, P = \(\frac{1}{3} m \frac{N}{V} \overline{V}^2\) ⇒ PV = \(\frac{1}{3} \mathrm{mNV}^2\)
Also for a gram molecule of the gas, PV = RT
Hence RT = \(\frac{1}{3}\) mNV2
3\(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{V}}\)T = \(\mathrm{m} \overline{\mathrm{V}}^2\) or \(\frac{1}{2}\) mV2 = \(\frac{3}{2}\)KBT [∵ \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{V}}\) = KB]
Where KB is the Boltzmann constant and T is the absolute temperature. ∴ E = \(\frac{3}{2}\)KBT
Hence the average kinetic energy of a molecule is proportional to the absolute temperature of the gas.

Question 5.
Two thermally insulated vessels 1 and 2 of volumes V1 and V2 are joined with a valve and filled with air at temperatures (T1, T2) and pressures (P1, P2) respectively. If the valve joining the two vessels is opened, what will be the temperature inside the vessels at equilibrium.
Answer:
During adiabatic process, there is no loss of energy, i.e. K.ET of molecules before mixing = K.ET of molecules after mixing.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory 1

Question 6.
What is the ratio of r.m.s speed of Oxygen and Hydrogen molecules at the same temperature ?
Answer:
The r.m.s speed of gas is \(\overline{\mathrm{V}}=\sqrt{\frac{3 R T}{M}} \Rightarrow \frac{\overline{\mathrm{V}}_0}{\mathrm{~V}_{\mathrm{H}}}=\sqrt{\frac{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{H}}}{\mathrm{M}_{\mathrm{O}}}}\), Given MH = 2 and M0 = 32
\(\frac{\overline{\mathrm{V}}_0}{\overline{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{H}}}=\sqrt{\frac{2}{32}}=\frac{1}{4}\)
∴ V0 : VH = 1 : 4

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 7.
Four molecules of a gas have speeds 1, 2, 3 and 4 km/s. Find the rms speed of the gas molecule.
Answer:
Given V1 = 1 km/s; V2= 2 km/s; V3 = 3 km/s; V4 = 4 km/s; = ?
Vrms = \(\sqrt{\frac{V_1^2+V_2^2+V_3^2+V_4^2}{n}}=\sqrt{\frac{1^2+2^2+3^2+4^2}{4}}\)
= \(\sqrt{\frac{1+4+9+16}{4}}=\sqrt{\frac{30}{4}}=\sqrt{7.5}\)
= 2735 kms-1

Question 8.
If a gas has ‘f’ degrees of freedom, find the ratio of CP and CV.
Answer:
If a gas has ‘f’ degrees of freedom, then
CV = \(\frac{f}{2}\)R and CP = CV + R = \(\frac{f}{2}\) R + R = (\(\frac{f}{2}\) + 1)R
Hence the ratio of the two specific heats of a gas is, r = \(\frac{C_p}{C_V}=\left[\frac{\frac{f}{2}+1}{\frac{f}{2} R}\right]=1+\frac{2}{f}\)

Question 9.
Calculate the molecular K.E of 1 gram of Helium (Molecular weight 4) at 127°C. Given R = 8.31 J mol-1 K-1.
Answer:
Given, t = 127°C, T = 273 + 127 = 400; R = 8.31 J mol-1 K-1
K.E. = \(\frac{3}{2}\)KBT = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 1.38 × 10-23 × 400 = 8.28 × 10-21 J.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 10.
When pressure increases by 2%, what is the percentage decrease in the volume of a gas, assuming Boyle’s law is obeyed ?
Answer:
The gas obeys the Boyles law PV = constant, on differentiating, PdV + VdP = 0
PdV = – V dP ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{V}}=\frac{-\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{P}}\) ⇒ \(\frac{\mathrm{dV}}{\mathrm{V}}\) × 100% = –\(\frac{-\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{P}}\) × 100%
% change in volume = – percentage change in pressure
∴ % change in volume = – 2%
Here negative sign indicates decrease in volume.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Derive an expression for the Pressure of an ideal gas in a container from Kinetic Theory and hence give Kinetic Interpretation of Temperature.
Answer:
Let us consider cubical vessel of side T with perfectly elastic wall containing gas molecules. Let the three sides of the cube be taken as co-ordinate axis. Consider a molecule moving with velocity V, in any direction at any instant. The components of V1 along the three sides are Vx, Vy and Vz respectively. Then
\(\overline{V}^2=V_x^2+V_y^2+V_z^2\) ……………………. (1)
If ‘m is the mass of this molecule, it transfers a momentum mV when it strikes the face ABCD of the cube. Since the wall is perfectly elastic, this molecule is reflected back with a velocity – Vx and momentum – mVx. So the change in momentum = mVx – (- mVx)
= 2mVx
This molecule then travels towards the opposite face, collide with it, rebounds and travels again towards the face ABCD. The distance travelled between two successive collisions is 2l. Time taken between two successive collisions is \(\frac{2 l}{\mathrm{~V}_{\mathrm{x}}}\)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory 2
∴ Number of collisions per second = \(\frac{V_x}{2 l}\)
Change in momentum per second = (2mVx) × \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{x}}}{2 l}\right)=\frac{\mathrm{mV}_{\mathrm{x}}^2}{l}\)
Thus force exerted by this molecule = \(\frac{\mathrm{mV}_{\mathrm{x}}^2}{l}\) [∵ F = \(\frac{\mathrm{dP}}{\mathrm{dt}}\)]
Hence, force exerted by N such molecule in the X-direction.
f1 = \(\mathrm{N} \frac{\mathrm{mV}_{\mathrm{x}}^2}{l}=\frac{\mathrm{mNV}_{\mathrm{x}}^2}{l}\)
∴ Pressure exerted by the molecules in the x-direction is Px = \(\frac{f_1}{l^2}=\frac{m N \overline{V}_x^2}{l^3}\)
Similarly, pressure exerted by the molecules in the y and z-directions are
Py = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{l^3} \mathrm{~N} \overline{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{y}}^2\) and Pz = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{l^3} \mathrm{~N} \overline{\mathrm{V}}_{\mathrm{z}}^2\)
Since the pressure exerted by a gas in all the directions is same, the average pressure
P = \(\frac{P_x+P_y+P_z}{3}=\frac{m N}{3 l^3}\left[V_x^2+v_y^2+V_z^2\right]=\frac{m N}{3 V} \overline{V}^2\) [ from (1) and V = l3]
Here V2 is the mean square velocity of the molecule, V is the volume of the vessel.
If M is the mass of the gas then M = mN
∴ P = \(\frac{1}{3} \frac{M^2}{V}=\frac{1}{3} m n \overline{V}^2\) [∵ n = \(\frac{N}{V}\)]
This pressure is actually the pressure exerted by an ideal gas.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

b) Kinetic interpretation of temperature :
Since the pressure of the gas is given by
P = \(\frac{1}{3} m n \overline{V}^2\), where m = mass of the gas, n = \(\frac{N}{V}\) = Number of molecules per unit volume
\(\overline{V}\) = r.m.s velocity of gas
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory 3
Here KB is Boltzmann constant. So mean kinetic energy of a molecule is \(\frac{3}{2}\) KBT, which depends upon the temperature. As temperature increases means kinetic energy of the molecules also increases.

Additional Problems

Question 1.
Estimate the fraction of molecular volume to the actual volume occupied by oxygen gas at STP. Take the diameter of an oxygen molecule to be 3 Å.
Solution:
Here, diameter,
d = 3A°, r = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{2}=\frac{3}{2}\) A° = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 10-8 cm.
Molecular volume,
v = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3N, where N is Avagadros No.
= \(\frac{4}{3}\) × \(\frac{22}{7}\) (1.5 × 10-8)3 × (6.023 × 1023)
= 8.52 cc.
Actual volume occupied by 1 mole of oxygen at STP v = 22400 cc
= \(\frac{v}{v^{\prime}}=\frac{8.52}{22400}\) = 3.8 × 10-4 = 4 × 10-4.

Question 2.
Molar volume is the volume occupied by 1 mol of any (ideal) gas at standard temperature and pressure (STP : 1 atmospheric pressure, 0 °C.) Show that it is 22.4 litres.
Solution:
For one mole of an ideal gas, ρv = RT
∴ v = \(\frac{\mathrm{RT}}{\rho}\)
Put R = 8.31 J mole-1 k-1, T = 273k, ρ = 1 atm = 1.013 × 105 Nm-2
v = \(\frac{8.31 \times 273}{1.013 \times 10^5}\) = o.0224m3 = 0.0224 × 106
cc = 22400 cc = 22.4 lit.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 3.
Figure 14.8 shows plot of PV/T versus P for 1.00 × 10-3 kg of oxygen gas at two different temperatures.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory 4
a) What does the dotted plot signify ?
b) Which is true: T1 > T2 or T1 < T2 ?
c) What is the value of PV/T where the curves meet on they y-axis ?
d) If we obtained similar plots for 1.00 × 10-3 kg of hydrogen, would we get the same value of PV/T at the point where the curves meet on the y-axis ? If not, what mass of hydrogen yields the same value of PV/T (for low pressurehigh temperature region of the plot) ? (Molecular mass of H2 = 2.02 u, of O2 = 32.0 u, R = 8.31 J mole-1 K-1.)
Solution:
a) The dotted plot shows that \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\) (= μR) is a constant quantity, independent of pressure p. This sign signifies the ideal gas behaviour.

b) The curve at temperature T1 is closer to dotted plot than the curve at temperature T2. As the behaviour of a real gas approaches the behaviour of a perfect gas when temperature is increased, therefore T1 > T2.

c) Where the two curves meet, the value of
\(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\) on y-axis is equal to μR.
As mass of oxygen gas = 1.00 × 10-3 kg = 1g
\(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = nR (\(\frac{1}{32}\)) × 8.31 Jk-1.

d) If we obtained similar plots for 1.00 × 10-3 kg of hydrogen, we will not get the same value of \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\) at the point, where the curve meets on the y-axis. This is because molecular mass of hydrogen is different from that of oxygen.
For same value of \(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\) mass of hydrogen required is obtained from.
\(\frac{\mathrm{PV}}{\mathrm{T}}\) = nR = \(\frac{\mathrm{M}}{2.02}\) × 8.31 = 0.26
M = \(\frac{2.02 \times 0.26}{8.31}\) gm = 6.32 × 10-2 grams.

Question 4.
All oxygen cylinder of volume 30 litres has an initial gauge pressure of 15 atm and a temperature of 27 °C. After some oxygen is withdrawn from the cylinder, the gauge pressure drops to 11 atm and its temperature drops to 17 °C. Estimate the mass of oxygen taken out of the cylinder (R = 8.31 J mol-1 K-1, molecular mass of O2 = 32 u).
Solution:
Initially in the oxygen cylinder,
v1 = 30 lit = 30 × 10-3 m3
P1 = 15 atm = 15 × 1.01 × 105 Pa;
T1 = 27 + 273 = 300 k.
If the cylinder contains n1 mole of oxygen gas, then
P1v1 = nRT1
(or) n1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_1 \mathrm{~V}_1}{\mathrm{RT}_1}=\frac{\left(15 \times 1.01 \times 10^5\right) \times\left(30 \times 10^{-3}\right)}{8.3 \times 300}\)
= 18.253 .
For oxygen, molecular weight, M = 32 g
Initial mass of cylinder,
M1 = n1 M = 18.253 × 32 = 584.1 g
Finally in the oxygen cylinder, let n2 moles of O2 be left, were,
v2 = 30 × 10-3 m3, P2 = 11 × 1.01 × 105 Pa, T2 = 17 + 273 = 29K
Now
n2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{P}_2 \mathrm{~V}_2}{\mathrm{RT}_2}=\frac{\left(11 \times 1.01 \times 10^5\right) \times\left(30 \times 10^{-3}\right)}{8.3 \times 290}\)
= 13.847
∴ Final mass of oxygen gas in the cylinder,
m2 = 13.847 × 32 = 453.1 g
∴ Mass of oxygen taken out = m1 – m2 = 631.0 g.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 5.
An air bubble of volume 1.0 cm3 rises from the bottom of a lake 40 m deep at a temperature of 12 °C. To what volume does it grown when it reaches the surface, which is at a temperature of 35 °C ?
Solution:
v1 = 1.0 cm3 = 1.0 × 10-6 m3,
T1 = 12 °C = 12 + 273 = 285 k
P1 = 1 atm + h1 ρg = 1.01 × 105 + 40 × 103 × 9.8
= 493000 Pa.
When the air bubble reaches at the surface of lake, then
v2 = 2, T2 = 35 °C = 35 + 273 = 308 K,
P2 = 10 atm = 1.01 × 105 pa.
Now \(\frac{P_1 v_1}{T_1}=\frac{P_2 v_2}{T_2}\) (or) v2 = \(\frac{P_1 v_1 T_2}{T_1 P_2}\)
∴ v2 = \(\frac{(493000) \times\left(1.0 \times 10^{-6}\right) \times 308}{285 \times 1.01 \times 10^5}\)
= 5.27 × 10-6m3.

Question 6.
Estimate the total number of air molecules (inclusive of oxygen, nitrogen, water vapour and other constituents) in a room of capacity 25.0 m3 at a temperature of 27 °C and 1 atm pressure.
Solution:
Here, v = 25.0 m3, T = 27 + 273 = 300 k,
k = 1.38 × 10-23 Jk-1
Now Pv = nRT = n(NK) T = (nN) kT = N’kT
When nN = N’ = total no. of air molecules in the given gas.
N’ = \(\frac{\mathrm{Pv}}{\mathrm{kT}}=\frac{\left(1.01 \times 10^5\right) \times 25}{\left(1.38 \times 10^{-23}\right) \times 300}\) = 6.10 × 1026

Question 7.
Estimate the average thermal energy of helium atom at (i) room temperature (27 °C), (ii) the temperature on the surface of the Sun (6000 K), (iii) the temperature of 10 million kelvin (the typical core temperature in the case of a star).
Solution:
i) Here, T = 27 °C = 27 + 273 = 300 k
Average thermal energy
= \(\frac{3}{2}\) kT = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 1.38 × 10-23 × 300
= 6.2 × 10-21 J

ii) At T = 6000 k. Average thermal energy = \(\frac{3}{2}\)kT = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 1.38 × 10-23 × 6000
= 1.24 × 10-19 J.

iii) At T = 10 million K = 107 K.
Average thermal energy
= \(\frac{3}{2}\)kT = \(\frac{3}{2}\) × 1.38 × 10-23 × 107
= 2.1 × 10-16 J.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 8.
Three vessels of equal capacity have gases at the same temperature and pressure. The first vessel contains neon (monatomic), the second contains chlorine (diatomic), and the third contains uranium hexafluoride (poly-atomic). Do the vessels contain equal number of respective molecules ? Is the root mean square speed of molecules the same in the three cases ? If not, in which case is urms the largest ?
Solution:
All the three vessels (at the same temperature and pressure) have same volume. So in accordance with the avagadro’s law, the three vessels will contain equal number of respective molecules, being equal to
Avagadro’s number N = 6.023 × 1023
As vrms = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 k T}{m}}\)
i.e., vrms ∝ \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{m}}\) at a given temp, therefore, rms speed of molecules will not be same in the three cases.
As neon has the smallest mass, therefore, rms speed will be largest in case of neon.

Question 9.
At what temperature is the root mean square speed of an atom in an argon gas cylinder equal to the rms speed of a helium gas atom at – 20 °C ? (atomic mass of Ar = 39.9 u, of He = 4.0 u).
Solution:
Let c and c’ be the rms velocity of argon and a helium gas atoms at temperature TK and TK’ respectively.
Here μ = 39.9, μ = 4.0,
T = 2, T’ = -20 + 273 = 253 K.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory 5

Question 10.
Estimate the mean free path and collision frequency of a nitrogen molecule in a cylinder containing nitrogen at 2.0 atm and temperature 17 °C. Take the radius of a nitrogen molecule to be roughly 1.0 Å. Compare the collision time with the time the molecule moves freely between two successive collisions (Molecular mass of N2 = 28.0 u).
Solution:
Here, λ = 2, f = 2
P = 2 atm = 2 × 1.013 × 105 Nm-2
T = 17 °C = (17 + 273) K = 290 k
σ = 2 × 1 = 2A° = 2 × 10-10 m
K = 1.38 × 10-23 J molecule-1 k-1,
μ = 28 × 10-3 kg
λ = \(\frac{\mathrm{KT}}{\sqrt{2} \pi \sigma^2 \rho}\)
= \(\frac{1.38 \times 10^{-23} \times 290}{1.414 \times 3.14\left(2 \times 10^{-10}\right)^2 \times 2.026 \times 10^5}\)
λ = \(\frac{1.38 \times 29 \times 10^{-7}}{1.44 \times 3.14 \times 2.06}\) = 1.11 × 10-7 m.
vrms = \(\sqrt{\frac{3 R T}{M}}=\sqrt{\frac{3 \times 8.31 \times 290}{28 \times 10^{-3}}}\) = 508.24 m/s.
Collision frequency = no. of collisions per second = \(\frac{v_{r m s}}{\lambda}=\frac{508.24}{1.11 \times 10^{-7}}\) = 4.58 × 109

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 11.
A metre long narrow bore held horizontally (and closed at one end) contains a 76 cm long mercury thread, which traps a 15 cm column of air. What happens if the tube is held vertically with the open end at the bottom ?
Solution:
When the tube is held horizontally, the mercury of length 76 cm traps length of air = 15 cm. A length of 9 cm of the tube will be left at the open end. Fig. (a). The pressure Of air enclosed in tube will be atmospheric pressure. Let area of cross section of the tube be 1 sq.cm.
∴ P1 = 76 cm and v1 = 15 cm3.
When the tube is held vertically, 15 cm air gets another 9 cm of air (filled in the right hand side position) and let h cm of the mercury flows out to balance the atmospheric pressure. Fig. (b). Then the heights of air column and mercury column are (24 + h) cm and (76 – h) cm respectively.
The pressure of air = 76 – (76 – h) = h cm of mercury
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory 6
∴ v2 = (24 + h) cm3 and P2 = hcm.
If we assume that temperature remains constant, then
P1v1 = P2v1 or 76 × 15 = h × (24 + h) or h2 + 24h – 1140 = 0
(or) h = \(\frac{-24 \pm \sqrt{(24)^2+4 \times 1140}}{2}\) = 23.8 cm
(or) -47.8 cm.
Since h cannot be negative, therefore h = 23.8 cm.
In vertical position it flows out (23.8) cm.

Question 12.
From a certain apparatus, the diffusion rate of hydrogen has an average value of 28.7 cm3s-1. The diffusion of another gas under the same conditions is measured to have an average rate of 7.2 cm3s-1. Identify the gas.
[Hint: Use Graham’s law of diffusion : R1/R2 = (M2/M1) where R1, R2 are diffusion rates of gases 1 and 2 and M1 and M2 their respective molecular masses. The law is a simple consequence of kinetic theory.]
Solution:
According to Graham’s law of diffusion
\(\frac{r_1}{r_2}=\sqrt{\frac{M_2}{M_1}}\)
Where
r1 = diffusion rate of hydrogen = 28.7 cm3s-1
r2 = diffusion rate of unknown gas = 7.2 cm3s-1
M1 = molecule wt. of hydrogen = 2u M2 = ?
M2 = ?
∴ \(\frac{28.7}{7.2}=\sqrt{\frac{\mu_2}{\mu_1}} \text { or } M_2=\left(\frac{28.7}{7.2}\right)^2 \times 2\) = 31.78
≈ 32 µ

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 13.
A gas in equilibrium has uniform density and pressure throughout its volume. This is strictly true only if there are no external influences. A gas column under gravity, for example, does not have uniform density (and pressure). As you might expect, its density decreases with height. The precise dependence is given by the so- called law of atmospheres.
n2 = n1 exp [-mg(h2 – h1)/KBT] Where n2, n1 refer to number density at heights h2 and h1 respectively. Use this relation to derive the equation for sedimentation equilibrium of a suspension in a liquid column :
n2 = n1 exp [-mg NA (ρ – P) (h2 – h1)/(ρRT]
Where ρ is the density of the suspended particle and ρ that of surrounding medium. [NA is Avogadro’s number and R the universal gas constant.]
[Hint: Use Archimedes principle to f ind the apparent weight of the suspended particle.]
Solution:
According to the law of atmospheres n2 = n1 exp. [-\(\frac{m g}{K_B T}\) (h2 – h1)] ………… (1)
Where n2 n1 refer to number density of particles at heights h2 and h1 respectively. If we consider the sedimentation equilibrium of suspended particles in a liquid, then in place of mg, we will have to take effective weight of suspended particles.
Let
v = average vol. of suspended particle
ρ = density of suspended particle
ρ’ = density of liquid
m = mass of one suspended particle
m’ = mass of equal vol. of liquid displaced
According to Archimedis principle, effective weight of one suspended particle.
= actual weight – weight of liquid displaced
= mg – m’ g
= mg – v P’g = mg – (m/P) P’g = mg \(\left(\frac{1-\rho^{\prime}}{\rho}\right)\)
Also boltzman constant, KB = \(\frac{R}{N A}\) ………….. (i)
Where R is gas constant and NA is Avagadros number.
Putting mg \(\left(\frac{1-\rho^{\prime}}{\rho}\right)\) in place of mg and value of KB in (i).
We get
n2 = n1 exp \(\left[-\frac{\text { mgNA }}{R T} \cdot\left(1-\frac{\rho^{\prime}}{\rho}\right)\left(h_2-h_1\right)\right]\)
Which is the required relation.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 14.
Given below are densities of some solids and liquids. Give rough estimates of the size of their atoms :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory 7
[Hint: Assume the atoms to be tightly packed1 in a solid or liquid phase, and use the known value of Avogadro’s number. You should, however, not take the actual numbers you obtain for various atomic sizes too literally. Because of the crudeness of the tight packing approximation, the results only indicate that atomic sizes are in the range of few Å].
Solution:
If r is the radius of the atom, then volume of each atom = \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3
Volume of all atoms in one mole of substance
= \(\frac{4}{3}\) πr3 × N = μ/P
r = \(\left[\frac{3 \mu}{4 \pi \mathrm{PN}}\right]^{\frac{1}{3}}\)
For carbon p = 12.01 × 10-3 kg,
P = 2.22 × 103 kg m-3
r = \(\frac{3 \times 12.01 \times 10^{-3}}{4 \times \frac{22}{7} \times\left(2.2210^3\right) \times\left(6.02310^{23}\right)}\)
r = 1.29 × 10-10 m = 1.29A°
Similarly for gold
r = 1.59A°
For liquid nitrogen r = 1.77A°
For lithium r = 1.73A°
For liquid fluorine r = 1.88A°

Textual Examples

Question 1.
The density of water is 1000 kg m-3. The density of water vapour at 100° C and 1 atm pressure is 0.6 kg m-3. The volume of a molecule multiplied by the total number gives. What is called, molecular volume. Estimate the ratio (or fraction) of the molecular volume to the total volume occupied by the water vapour under the above conditions of temperature and pressure.
Answer:
For a given mass of water molecules, the density is less if volume is large. So the volume of the vapour is 1000/0.6 = /(6 × 10-4) times, large. If densities of bulk water and water molecules are same, then the fraction of molecular volume to the total volume in liquid state is 1. As volume in vapour state has increased, the fractional volume is less by the same amount, i.e. 6 × 10-4.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 2.
Estimate the volume of a water molecule using the data in Example 1.
Answer:
In the liquid (or solid) phase, the molecules of water are quite closely packed. The density of water molecule may therefore, be regarded as roughly equal to the density of bulk water = 1000 kgm-3. We know that 1 mole of water has a mass approximately equal to (2 + 16)g = 18 g = 0.018 kg.
Since 1 mole contains about 6 × 1023 molecules (Avogadro’s number).
The mass of a molecule of water is (0.018) / (6 × 1023) kg = 3 × 10-26 kg.
Volume of a water molecule = (3 × 10-26 kg) (1000 kg m-3)
= 3 × 10-29 m3
= (4/3)π (Radius)3
∴ Radius » 2 × 10-10 m = 2Å

Question 3.
What is the average distance between atoms (interatomic distance) in water ? Use the data given in Examples 1 and 2.
Answer:
A given mass of water in vapour state has 1.67 × 103 times the volume of the same mass of water inliquid state (e.g. 1). When volume increases by 103 times the radius increases by V1/3 or 10 times,
i.e., = 10 × 12 = 2Å.
So the average distanceis 2 × 10 40 Å.

Question 4.
A vessel contains two non-reactive gases : neon (monatomic) and oxygen (diatomic). The ratio of their partial pressures is 3 : 2. Estimate the ratio of (i) number of molecules and (ii) mass density of neon and oxygen in the vessel. Atomic mass of Ne = 20.2 u, molecular mass of O2 = 32.0 u.
Answer:
Each gas (assumed ideal) obeys the gas law. Since V and T are common to the two gases, we have P1V = μ1 RT and P2V = μ2 RT. i.e., (P1 / P2) = (μ1 / p2). Here 1 and 2 refer to neon and oxygen respectively.
Since (P1 / P2) = (3/2) (given), (μ1 / μ2) = 3/2.

i) By definition μ1 = (N1 /NA) and μ2 = (N2/NA) where N1 and N2 are the number of molecules of 1 and 2, and NA is the Avogadro’s number. Therefore,
(N1/N2) = (μ12) = 3/2.

ii) We can also write μ1 = (m1/ M1) and μ2 = (m2 / M2) where m1 and m2 are their molecular masses. (Both m1 and M1; as well as m2 and M2 should be expressed in the same units). If ρ1 and ρ2 are the mass densities of 1 and 2 respectively, we helve
\(\frac{\rho_1}{\rho_2}=\frac{m_1 / V}{m_2 / V}=\frac{m_1}{m_2}=\frac{\mu_1}{\mu_2} \times\left[\frac{M_1}{M_2}\right]\)
= \(\frac{3}{2} \times \frac{20.2}{30.2}\) = 0.947

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 5.
A flask contains argon and chlorine in the ratio of 2 : 1 by mass. The temperature of the mixtures is 27° C. Obtain the ratio of (i) average kinetic energy per molecule and (ii) root mean square speed vrms of the molecules of the two gases. Atomtic mass of argon = 39.9 u. Molecular mass of chlorine = 70.9 u.
Answer:
The important point to remember is that the average kinetic energy (per molecule) of any (ideal) gas (be it monatomic like argon, diatomic like chlorine or polyatomic) is always equal to (3/2) kBT. It depends only on temperature and is independent of the nature of the gas.
i) Since argon and chlorine both have the same temperature in the flask, the ratio of average kinetic energy (per molecule) of the two gases is 1 : 1.
ii) Now 1/2 mvrms2 = average kinetic energy . per molecule = (3/2) KBT where m is the mass of a molecule of the gas. Therefore,
\(\frac{\left(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{rms}}^2\right)_{A \mathrm{C}}}{\left(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{ms}}^2\right)_{\mathrm{cl}}}=\frac{(\mathrm{m})_{\mathrm{C}}}{(\mathrm{m})_{\mathrm{Ar}}}=\frac{(\mathrm{M})_{\mathrm{Cl}}}{(\mathrm{M})_{\mathrm{Ar}}}=\frac{70.9}{39.9}\) = 1.77
where M denotes the molecular mass of the gas.
\(\frac{\left(\mathrm{V}_{\text {rms }}\right)_{\mathrm{Ar}}}{\left(\mathrm{V}_{\mathrm{rms}}\right)_{\mathrm{cl}}}\) = 1.33

Question 6.
a) When a molecule (or an elastic ball) hits a (massive) wall, it rebounds with the same speed. When a ball hits a massive bat held firmly, the same thing happens. However, when the bat is moving towards the ball, the ball rebounds with a different speed. Does the ball move faster or slower ? (ch. 6 will refresh your memory on elastic collisions).
b) When gas in a cylinder is compressed by pushing in a piston, its temperature rises. Guess at an explanation of this in terms of kinetic theory using (a) above.
c) What happens when a compressed gas pushes a piston out and expands. What would you observe ?
d) Sachin Tendulkar uses a heavy cricket bat while playing. Does it help him in anyway ?
Answer:
a) Let the speed of the ball be u relative to the wicket behind the bat. If the bat is moving towards the ball with a speed V relative to the wicket, then the relative speed of the ball to bat is V + u towards the bat. When the ball rebounds (after hitting the massive bat) its speed, relative to bat, is V + u moving away from the bat. So relative to the wicket the speed of the rebounding ball is V + (V + u) = 2V + u, moving away from the wicket. So the ball speeds up after the collision with the bat. The rebound speed will be less than u if the bat is not massive. For a molecule this would imply an increase in temperature.
You should be able to answer (b) (c) and (d) based on the answer to (a).

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 14 Kinetic Theory

Question 7.
A cylinder of fixed capacity 44.8 litres contains helium gas at standard temperature and pressure. What is the amount of heat needed to raise the temperature of the gas in the cylinder by 15.0° C ? (R = 8.31 J mol-1 K-1).
Answer:
Using the gas law PV = μRT, you can easily show that 1 mol of any (ideal) gas at standard temperature (273 K) and pressure (1 atm = 1.01 × 105 Pa) occupies a volume of 22.4 litres. This universal volume is called molar volume. Thus the cylinder in this example contains 2 mol of helium. Further, since helium is monatomic, its predicted (and observed) molar specific heat at constant volume, Cv = (3/2) R, and molar specific heat at constant pressure, Cp = (3/2) R + R =(5/2) R. Since the volume of the cylinder is fixed, the heat required is determined by Cv.
Therefore,
Heat required = no. of moles × molar specific heat × rise in temperature
= 2 × 1.5 R × 15.0 = 45
R = 45 × 8.31 = 374 J.

Question 8.
Estimate the mean free path for water molecule in water vapour at 373 K. Use information from Exercises 1 and above. l = 2.9 × 10-7 m = 1500d.
Ans. The d for water vapour is same as that of air. The number density is inversely proportional to absolute temperature.
So n = 2.7 × 1025 × \(\frac{273}{373}\) = 2 × 1025 m-3
Hence, mean free path l = 4 × 10-7 m.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 13th Lesson Thermodynamics Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 13th Lesson Thermodynamics

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define Thermal equilibrium. How does it lead to the Zeroth Law of Thermodynamics?
Answer:
If the temperatures of the two systems are equal, then they are said to be in thermal equilibrium.
Zeroth law of thermodynamics: “If two systems (A, B) are in thermal equilibrium with the third system (c) separately, then two systems (A, B) thermal equilibrium with each other.”

Question 2.
Define Calorie. What is the relation between calorie and mechanical equivalent of heat?
Answer:
Calorie : It is defined to be the amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1g of water from 14.5°C to 15.5°C.
The relation between calorie and mechanical equivalent of heat is given by 1 cal = 4186 J Kg-1K-1 or 1 cal = 4.186 J g-1K-1.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Qeustion 3.
What thermodynamic variables can be defined by
a) Zeroth Law
b) First Law ?
Answer:
a) Temperature
b) Internal energy.

Question 4.
Define specific heat capacity of the substance. On which factors does it depend ?
Answer:
Specific heat capacity :
The amount of heat required to raise the 1 gm of substance through 1°c or 1 k is called specific heat capacity (or) the heat capacity per unit mass is called specific heat.
S = \(\left(\frac{1}{m}\right) \frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta T}\)
It depends on 1) natuture of the substance 2) temperature.

Question 5.
Define molar specific heat capacity.
Answer:
Molar specific heat capacity : The amount of heat required to raise the 1gm mole of substance through 1°C or 1°K is called molar specific heat capacity.

Question 6.
For a solid, what is the total energy of an oscillator ?
Answer:
For a mole of a solid, the total energy of an oscillator, U = 3KB T × NA = 3RT.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 7.
Indicate the graph showing the variation of specific heat of water with temperature. What does it signify ?
Ans.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics 1
Significance : the specific heat of water varies slightly with temperature in the range 0 to 100°C.

Question 8.
Define state variables and equation of state.
Answer:
State variables : The state of a system is described by pressure P, temparature T, density p (intensive variables) and internal energy U, Volume V, total mass M (Extensive variables). These are called state variables.

Equation of state : The connection between the state variables is called the equation of state.

Question 9.
Why a heat engine with 100% efficiency can never be realised in practise ?
Answer:
The efficiency of heat engine is η = 1 – \(\frac{Q_2}{Q_1}\)
For Q2 = 0, η = 1, i.e., the engine will have 100% efficiency in converting heat into work.
The first law of thermodynamics does not rule out such an engine. But experience shows that such an ideal engine with η = 1 is never possible.

Question 10.
In summer, when the valve of a bicycle tube is opened, the escaping air appears cold.
Answer:
This happens due to adiabatic expansion of the air of the tube of the bicycle.

Question 11.
Why does the brake drum of an automobile get heated up while moving down at constant speed ?
Answer:
The work done by the brake drum on wheel is converted into heat due to friction.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 12.
Can a room be cooled by leaving the door of an electric refrigerator open ?
Answer:
No, a room can not be cooled by leaving the door of a refrigerator open, rather it will get slightly heated.

Question 13.
Which of the’ two will increase the pressure more, an adiabatic or an isothermal process, in reducing the volume to 50% ?
Answer:
Isothermal process obeys , P1V1 = P2V2
But V2 = \(\frac{\mathrm{v_1}}{2}\) ⇒ P1V1, = P2 \(\frac{\mathrm{v_1}}{2}\)
∴ P2 = 2P1
Adiabatic process obeys, P1V1γ = P2V2γ
P2 = \(P_1\left[\frac{v_1}{v_2}\right]^\gamma=p_1\left[\frac{v_1}{\frac{v_1}{2}}\right]\)
∴ P2 = 2γ P1 Where r = \(\frac{C_p}{C_v}\)
∴ pressure is more in adiabatic than isothermal.

Question 14.
A thermoflask containing a liquid is shaken vigorously. What happens to its temperature ? .
Answer:
Work is done by the liquid on the wall of flask, since it is vigorously shaken. Hence Internal energy and temperature of the liquid increases.

Question 15.
A sound wave is sent into a gas pipe. Does its internal energy change ?
Answer:
Yes, a sound wave is sent into a gas pipe internal energy increases.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 16.
How much will be the internal energy change in

  1. isothermal process
  2. adiabatic process

Answer:

  1. Change in internal energy during isothermal process is dU = 0 [∵ U is constant)]
  2. a) Change in internal energy during adiabatic compression increases,
    b) Change in internal energy during adiabatic expansion decreases.

Question 17.
The coolant in a chemical or a nuclear plant should have.high specific heat. Why ?
Answer:
In chemical and nuclear plants more heat is liberated. To absorb this heat, the coolant should have a property of high specific heat for small rise in temperature.
Since S = \(\frac{1}{m} \frac{d Q}{d t}\) ⇒ S ∝ \(\frac{1}{d t}\)

Question 18.
Explain the following processes

  1. Isochoric process
  2. Isobaric process

Answer:

  1. Isochoric process : A process takes place at constant volume is called Isochoric process. During this process, no work is done on or by the gas, its internal energy and its temperature changes.
  2.  Isoboric process : A process takes place at constant pressure is called isobaric process During this process temperature, internal energy changes. The heat absorbed goes partly to increase internal energy and partly to do work.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
State and explain first law of thermodynamics.
Answer:
Statement: The amount of heat supplied to system is equal to the algebraic sum of the change in internal energy of the system and the amount of external work-done.

Explanation : When ∆Q is the quantity of heat is supplied to system, a part of it is used to increase its internal energy ∆U and the rest is used in doing external work ∆W. The mathematical expressions of this law is ∆Q = ∆U – ∆W. It is a special case of law of conservation of energy.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 2.
Define two principal specific heats of a gas. Which is greater and why ?
Answer:
Two principal specific heats of a gas are

  1. Molar specific heat capacity at constant pressure
  2. molar specific heat capacity at constant volume.

1. Molar Specific heat capacity at constant pressure (Cp): The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1 gm – mole of a gas through 1°C at constant pressure is called molar specific heat at constant pressure.
i.e., Cp = \(\frac{1}{\mu} \frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta T}\) where μ is no of moles.

2. Molar Specific heat capacity at constant volume (Cv): The amount of heat required to raise the temperature of 1gm – mole of a gas through 1°C at constant volume is called molar specific heat at constant volume i.e., Cv = \(\frac{1}{\mu} \frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta T}\)

Explanation of Cp is greater that Cv: When a gas is heated at a constant pressure, it expands. The heat supplied to it is used partly in raising its temperature and partly in doing work against the external pressure. If, on the other hand, the gas is heated at constant volume, no work is done. Therefore, the heat supplied is to be used only in raising the temperature. Hence the amount of heat required to be supplied to a gas to raise its temperature by 1 °C (say) at constant pressure will be greater than the amount required at constant volume.

Question 3.
Derive a relation between the two specific heat capacities of gas on the basis of first law of thermodynamics
Answer:
The mathematical equation of first law of thermodynamics for 1 mole of gas is given by
∆Q = ∆U + P∆V
if ∆Q is absorbed heat at constant volume, ∆V = 0
Cv = \(\left[\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta T}\right]_V=\left[\frac{\Delta U}{\Delta T}\right]_V=\left[\frac{\Delta U}{\Delta T}\right]\) ……………. (1)
Where the subscript V is dropped in the last step, since U of an ideal gas depends only on temperature. (The subscript denotes the quantity kept fixed.) If, on the other hand, ∆Q is absorbed heat at constant pressure,
Cp = \(\left[\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta T}\right]_P=\left[\frac{\Delta U}{\Delta T}\right]_P+P\left[\frac{\Delta V}{\Delta T}\right]_P \Rightarrow\left[\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta T}\right]_P=\left[\frac{\Delta U}{\Delta T}\right]+P\left[\frac{\Delta V}{\Delta T}\right]_P\) ………………… (2)
The subscript p.can be dropped from the first term since U of an ideal gas depends only on T. Now, for a mole of an ideal gas.
PV = RT
Which gives P\(\left[\frac{\Delta V}{\Delta T}\right]_P\) = R
Putting the equations (1) and (3) in (2), we get
Cp = Cv + R
∴ Cp – Cv = R

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 4.
Obtain an expression for the work done by an ideal gas during isothermal change.
Answer:
Expression for the work done by an ideal gas during isothermal change : Let a certain mass of gas expands from volume V1 to V2 isothermally at constanst temperature T. Let the pressure changes form P1 to P2.
The work done during the small change in volume dv at a pressure ‘p’ is dw = pdv
The total work done during the change of volume from V1 to V2 is W = \(\int d w=\int_{V_1}^{V_2} p d v\) …………. (1)
The Isothermal change is represented by
PV = constant
PV = μRT ⇒ P =\(\frac{\mu \mathrm{RT}}{\mathrm{V}}\) where μ = no. of moles
substituting this value in equation (1)
W = \(\int_{V_1}^{v_2} p d v=\int_{V_1}^{V_2} \frac{\mu R T}{V} d V=\mu R T \int_{V_1}^{V_2} \frac{d v}{V}\)
W = μRT loge \(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\)
∴ Work done during the isothermal change W = 2.3026 RT log10 \(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\) .

Question 5.
Obtain an expression for the work done by an ideal gas during adiabatic change and explain.
Answer:
Expression for the work done by an ideal gas during adiabatic change :
During an adiabatic chnage the state of an ideal gas changes from (P1, V1, T1) to (P2, V2, T2)
The workdone during a small change in volume dV at a pressure p is dw = pdV
Total work done by gas from volume V1 to V2 is ,
W = \(\int\) dw = \(\int_{v_1}^{v_2}\) pdv ………………. (1)
The adiabatic relation between pressure and volume is given by PVr = constant K …………. (2)
P = \(\frac{k}{v^r}\) …………… (3)
and P1V1r = P2V2r = K
Substituting eg. (3) in (1) becomes
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics 2
This is equal to the work done during the adiabatic change.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 6.
Compare isothermal and an adiabatic process.
Answer:
Isothermal change

  1. Changes in volume and pressure of a gas taking place at constant temperature are called isothermal changes,
  2. Temperature of the gas remains constant.
  3. The gas remains in good thermal contact with the surroundings and heat is exchanged.
  4. Internal energy remains constant. Change in internal energy ∆U = 0
  5. This process takes place slowly.
  6. Boyle’s law PV = Constant holds good.
  7. Work done W = RT loge\(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\) .

Adiabatic change

  1. Changes in volume and pressure of a gas taking place in a thermally isolated system are called adiabatic changes.
  2. Temperature of the gas changes.
  3. The gas is isolated from the surroundings and heat is not exchanged ∆Q = 0.
  4. Internal energy changes.
  5. This process takes place quickly.
  6. PVr = Constant
  7. Work done W = \(\frac{R}{(r-1)}\)(T1 – T2)

Question 7.
Explain the following processes
i) Cyclic process with example
ii) Non cyclic process with example
Answer:
i) Cyclic process: “A process in which the system after passing through various stages (of pressure, volume and temperature changes) returns to its initial state1′ is called as a cyclic process.
For cyclic process P.V graph is a closed curve. The area under P-V graph gives work done by the substance. In a cyclic process there will be no change in the internal energy i.e., ∆U = 0
The first law of thermodynamics states that
∆Q = ∆U + ∆W
∴ For cyclic process ∆Q = ∆W
In cyclic process, the total heat absorbed by the system equals the work done by the system. Example : Fleat engine is a device by which a system is made to undergo a cyclic process that results in conversion of heat to work.

ii) Non cyclic process : A process which is not cyclic is called Non-cyclic process. In Non-cydic process, the system does not attains its initial state. Irreversible process is a Non cyclic process. Workdone in non-cyclic process is given by the area between the curve and volume axis.

Example :

  1. Diffusion of liquids or gases
  2. Free expansion of a perfect gas.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 8.
Write a short note on Quasi – static process.
Answer:
A quasi-static process is defined as “an infinitesimally slow process in which at each and every intermediate stage the system remains in thermal and mechanical (thermodynamic) equilibrium with the surroundings through out the entire process.”

In this process the pressure and temperature of the surroundings at each and every stage will differ from those of the system only in a very small amount.

Any process taking place sufficiently slowly, not involving acceleration motions and large temperature gradients can be considered as quasi -static process.
Example : isothermal process, adiabatic process.

Question 9.
Explain qualitatively the working of a heat engine.
Answer:
“A device used to convert heat energy into work (or mechanical energy)” is called heat engine. A heat engine converts heat into work.
A heat engine consists of the following essential parts :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics 3

  1. A body at a higher temperature T1. Heat Q1 is extracted from this body and hence it is called a “hot reservior” (or source).
  2. The engine contains working substance. In a steam engine the working substance is the steam. In a diesel engine the working substance is a mixture of fuel vapour and air.
  3. A body at lower temperature T2. Heat Q2 is rejected by the working substance to this body and hence it is called a cold reservoir (or sink).

The difference in heat absorbed (Q1) and heat rejected (Q2) is equal to the workdone by the system (W). This is because the engine is operated in a cyclic process. W = Q1 – Q2.

The heat engine operates in a cyclic process and in each cycle, the work done (W) by the system is transferred to the environment via some arrangement (shaft) to drive vehicles.

The efficiency (η) of aheat engine is defined as the ratio of the workdone (W) by the engine to the amount of heat absorbed (Q1) by the engine.
Efficiency (η) = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{\mathrm{Q}_1}=\frac{\mathrm{Q}_1-\mathrm{Q}_2}{\mathrm{Q}_1}=1-\frac{\mathrm{Q}_2}{\mathrm{Q}_1}\)

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain reversible and irreversible processes. Describe the working of Carnot engine. Obtain an expression for the effieciency. [AP – Mar. ’18, ’17, ’16, 15; TS – Mar. ’17, ’15, ’14]
Answer:
Reversible process : A process that can be retraced back in the opposite direction in such away that the system passes through the same states as in the direct process, and finally the system and the surroundings return in their original states, is called a reversible process.
A reversible process is only a purely idealised process.
Examples:

  1. Slow isothermal and slow adiabatic changes
  2. Peltier effect and seeback effect.
  3. Fusion of ice and vaporisation of water.

Irreversible process : “A process that cannot be retraced back in the opposite direction” is called as irreversible process.

In this process the system does not pass through the same intermediate states as in the reversible process.
All natural processes such as conduction, radiation, radioactivity etc, are irreversible.
Example:

  1. Work done against friction.
  2. Heat produced in conductors by passing a current through it. (Joule heating)
  3. Diffusion of gases.

Carnot Engine : A reversible heat engine operating between two temperatures is called a carnot engine. The cycle operating it is known as carnot’s cycle. In this cycle the working substance(say an ideal gas) is taken through a cycle by means of two isothermals and two adiabatics. The four operations are shown in P-V (Indicator) diagram.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics 4

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Step 1 → 2 : Isothermal expansion of the gas taking its state from (P1, V1, T1) to (P2, V2, T2). It is shown in curve (a).
The heat absorbed by the gas (Q1) from the reservoir at temperature
T1 equals the workdone by the gas. i.e.
W1 → 2 = Q1 = μRT1 loge \(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\)

Step 2 →3 : Adiabatic expansion of the gas from (P2, V2, T1) to (P3, V3, T2). It is shown in curve (b). The work done by the gas is gÑen by
W2 → 3 = \(\frac{\mu R\left(T_1-T_2\right)}{(r-1)}\)

Step 3 → 4: Isothermal compression of the gas from (P3, V3, T2) to (P4, V4, T2). It is shown in curve (c).
Heat released (Q2) by the gas to the reservoir at temperature T2 equals the work done on the goes.
i.e., W3 → 4;= μRT2 loge \(\frac{V_4}{V_3}\) = -μRT1 loge \(\frac{V_3}{V_4}\)

Step 4 → 1: Adiabatic compression of the gas from (P4, V4, T2) to (P1, V1, T1). It is shown in curve (d) Work done on the gas is given by.
W4 → 1 = μR \(\frac{\left(T_2-T_1\right)}{(r-1)}=-\mu R \frac{\left(T_1-T_2\right)}{(r-1)}\)
Total work done by the gas in one complete cycle is
W = W1 → 2 + W2 → 3 + W3 → 4 + W4 → 1
= \(\mu R T_1 \log _e \frac{V_2}{V_1}+\frac{\mu R\left(T_1-T_2\right)}{(r-1)}-\mu R T_2 \log _e \frac{V_3}{V_4}-\frac{\mu R\left(T_1-T_2\right)}{(r-1)}\)
∴ W = μRT1 loge \(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\) – μRT2 loge \(\frac{3}{V_4}\) = Q1 – Q2 …………… (2)
The efficiency of the cannot engine is
η = \(\frac{W}{Q_1}=\frac{Q_1-Q_2}{Q_1}\) ………… (3)
Now since step 2 → 3 is an adiabatic process,
T1V2r – 1 ≈ T2V3r – 1
Similarly, since step 4 → 1 is an adiabatic process,
T2V2r – 1 = T1V1r – 1 ⇒ T1V1r – 1 = T2V2r – 1
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics 5

Question 2.
State second law of thermodynamics. How is heat engine different form a refrigerator. [TS – Mar. ’18, ’16; AP – Mar. ’15, ’13]
Answer:
Second law of thermodynamics gives the direction of flow of heat. Second law consists two statements.

  1. Kelvin – Planck statement: “No process is possible whose sole result is the absorption of heat from a reservoir and the complete conversion of the heat into work”.
    (or)
    “It is impossible to derive a continuous supply of engines in cooling a body below the coldest of its surroundings1′.
  2. Clausius statement : “No process is possible whose sole result is the transfer of heat from a colder object to a hotter object”.
    (or)
    “Heat can not itself flow from cold body to hot body”.

Heat engine : A device which converts heat energy into work is called heat engine.
A heat engine consists of the essential parts.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics 6

  1. Source or hot reservoir: It is maintained at a very high temperature T1. Heat is extracted from this body.
  2. Working substance : In a steam engine working substance is steam. In a diesel engine working substance is mixture of fuel vapour and air.
  3. Sink or cold reservoir: It is maintained at a very low temperature T2. It absorbs heat energy, rejected by working substance.

Work done: The difference of heat absorbed from source and heat rejected to sink is equal to work done by the engine, i.e., W = Q1 – Q2.
Efficiency : The ratio of workdone (W) by the engine to the amount of heat absorbed (Q1) by the engine is called efficiency.
i.e., η = \(\frac{W}{Q_1}=\frac{Q_1-Q_2}{Q_1}=1-\frac{Q_2}{Q_1}\)
Refrigerator : Refrigerator is a heat pump which is the reverse of a heat engine.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics 7
In refrigerator the working substance extracts (Q2) an amount of heat from sink of lower temperature and a external work W is done on the working substance and finally amount of heat (Q1) is transfered to source.
The coefficient of performance (α) of a refrigerator is given by
α = \(\frac{\mathrm{Q}_2}{\mathrm{~W}}=\frac{\mathrm{Q}_2}{\mathrm{Q}_1-\mathrm{Q}_2}\) (∴ heat released Q1 = Q2 + W)
For heat engine η can never exceed 1. For refregirator a can be greater than 1.
Therefore working of refrigerator is opposite to that of heat engine.

Problems

Question 1.
If a monoatomic ideal gas of volume 1 litre at N.T.P. is compressed (i) adia- batically to half of its volume, find the work done on the gas. Also find (ii) the work done if the cdmpression is iso- thermal, (γ = 5/3)
Solution:
i) During an adiabatic process
T1V1r – 1 = T2V2r – 1
Here T1 = 273 K
V2 = \(\frac{V_1}{2}\)
r = \(\frac{5}{3}\)
T2 = \(\left[\frac{V_1}{V_2}\right]^{\frac{5}{3}-1}=273\left[\frac{V_1}{V_1}\right]^{\frac{2}{3}}\)
T2 = (2)\(\frac{2}{3}\) = 273 = 431.6 K
Number of moles = \(\frac{1 \text { litre }}{22.4 \text { litre }}=\frac{1}{22.4}\)
Work done = \(\frac{\mu R}{(r-1)}\) [T1 – T2]
= \(\frac{8.314}{22.4\left[\frac{5}{3}-1\right]}\) × (273 – 431.6)
= \(\frac{8.314 \times 3}{22.4 \times 2}\) (-158.6)
= -89 J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

ii) Work done during isothermal compression is
w = 2.3026 μRT log10\(\frac{V_2}{V_1}\)
μ = Number of moles = \(\frac{1}{22.4}\)
T = 273K
R = 8.314 Jmol-1K-2
\(\frac{V_2}{V_1}=\frac{1}{2}\) = 0.5
∴ W = \(\frac{2.3026 \times 8.314 \times 273 \log _{10}(0.5)}{22.4}\)
Or w = -70J

Question 2.
Five moles of hydrogren when heated through 20 K expand by an amount of 8.3 × 10-3m3 under a constant pressure of 105 N/m2. If Cv = 20.1/mole K, find Cp.
Solution:
Mayer’s relation Cp – Cv = R
Multiplying throughout by μ∆T
μCp∆T – μCv∆T = μ R∆T
μ ∆T(Cp – Cv) = P∆T [∴ μ R∆T = P∆V]
5 × 20 (Cp – 20) = 105 × 8.3 × (10 – 3)
[∴ μ = 5, ∆T = 20 K, P = 1 × 105 N/m2 Cv = 20 J/mole K and ∆V = 8.3 × 103 M3]
Cp – 20 = 8.3
∴ Cp = 28.3 J/mole-K

Additional Problems

Question 1.
A geyser heats water flowing at the rate of 3.0 litres per minute from 27 °C to 77 °C. If the geyser operate on a gas burner, what is the rate of consumption of the fuel if its heat of combustion is 4.0 × 104 J/g ?
Solution:
Here volume of water heated = 3.0 lit/min.
Mass of water heated m = 3000 g/min
Rise in temperature ∆T = 77 – 27 = 50°C
Sp. heat of water C = 4.2 Jg-1C-1
Amount of heat used
∆Q = mc∆T = 3000 × 4.2 × 50
= 63 × 104 J/min
Heat of combustion = 4 × 104 J/g
Rate of combustion of fuel = \(\frac{63 \times 10^4}{4 \times 10^4}\)
= 15.75 g/min

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 2.
What amount of heat must be supplied t 2.0 × 10-2 kg of nitrogen (at room temperature) to raise its temperature by 45 °C at constant pressure ? (Molecular mass of N2 = 28; R = 8.3 J mol-1 K-1.)
Solution:
Here mass of gas m = 2 × 10-2kg = 20g
Rise in temperature ∆T = 45°C
Heat required ∆Q = ?
Molecular mass M = 28
Number of moles n = \(\frac{m}{M}=\frac{20}{28}\) = 0.714
As nitrogen is a diatomic gas, molecular specific heat of constant pressure is
Cp = \(\frac{7}{2}\) R = \(\frac{7}{2}\) × 8.3 J mole-1 K-1
As ∆Q = nCp∆T
∆Q = 0.714 × \(\frac{7}{2}\) × 8.3 × 45 J = 933.4 J

Question 3.
Explain why
a) Two bodies at different temperatures T1 and T2 if brought in thermal contact do not necessarily settle to the mean temperature (T1 + T2)/2.
b) The coolant in a chemical or nuclear plant (i.e., the liquid used to prevent the different parts of a plant from getting too hot) should have high specific heat.
c) Air pressure in a car tyre increases during driving.
d) The climate of a harbour town is more temperate then that of a town in a desert at the same latitude.
Solution:
a) In thermal contact heat flows from the body at higher temp to the body at lower temperature till temperatures becomes equal. The final temperature can be the mean temp (T1 + T2)/2 only when thermal capacities of the two bodies are equal.

b) This is because heat absorbed by a substance is directly proportional to the specific heat of the substance.

c) During, driving the temperature of air inside the tyre increases due to motion. According to Charles law, P α T. Therefore, air pressure inside the tyre increases.

d) This is because in a harbour town, the relative humidity is more than in a desert town. Hence the climate of a harbour town is without extremes of hot and cold.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 4.
A cylinder with a movable piston contains 3 moles of hydrogen at standard temperature and pressure. The walls of the cylinder are made of a heat insulator, and the piston is insulated by having a pile of sand on it. By what factor does the pressure of the gas increase if the gas is compressed to half its original volume ?
Solution:
As no heat is allowed to be exchanged, the process is adiabatic.
∴ P2V2r = P1V1r (or) \(\frac{P_2}{P_1}=\left(\frac{V_1}{V_2}\right)^r\)
As V2 = \(\frac{V_1}{2}\)
∴ P2/P1 = \(\left(\frac{V_1}{\frac{1}{2} V_1}\right)^{1 .4}\)
= 21.4 = 2.64

Question 5.
In changing the state of a gas adiabatically form an equilibrium state A to another equilibrium state B, and amount of work equal to 22.3 J is done on the system. If the gas is taken from state A to B via a process in which the net heat absorbed by the system is 9.35 cal. how much is the net work done by the system in the latter case ? (Take 1 cal = 4.19 J)
Solution:
Here, when the change is adiabatic, ∆Q = 0, ∆w = -22.3 J
If ∆u is change in internal energy of the system, then as
∆Q = ∆u + ∆w
O = ∆u – 22.3 (or) ∆u = 22.3 J
In the second case ∆Q = 9.35 cal
= 9.35 × 4.2 J = 39.3 J
∆w = ?
As ∆u + ∆w = ∆Q
∆w = ∆Q – ∆u
= 39.3 – 22.3 = 17.0 J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 6.
Two cylinders A and B of equal capacity are connected to each other via a stopcock. A contains a gas at standard temperature and pressure. B is completely evacuated. The entire system is thermally insulated. The stopcock is suddenly opened. Answer the following :
a) What is the final pressure of the gas in A and B ?
b) What is the change in internal energy of the gas ?
c) What is the change in the temperature of the gas ?
d) Do the intermediate states of the system (before settling to the final equilibrium state) lie on its P-V-T surface ?
Solution:
a) When the stopcock is suddenly opened, the volume available to the gas at 1 atm pressure will become two times. Therefore pressure will decrease to one-half i.e., 0.5 atm.

b) There will be no change in the internal energy of the gas as no work is done on/ by the gas.

c) Also there will be no change in temp of the gas as gas does no work in expansion.

d) No, because the process called free expansion is rapid and cannot be controlled. The intermediate states are non equilibrium states and do not satisfy the gas equation. In due course, the gas does return to an equilibrium state.

Question 7.
A steam engine delivers 5.4 × 108J . of work per minute and services 3.6 × 109J of heat per minute form its boiler, what is the efficiency of the engine ? How much heat is wasted per minute ? .
Solution:
Output i.e., useful workdone per min
= 5.4 × 108 J
Input i.e., heat absorbed per min
= 3.6 × 109 J
Efficiency = \(\frac{\text { Output }}{\text { Input }}=\frac{5.4 \times 10^8}{3.6 \times 10^9}\) = 0.15
= 0.15 × 100% = 15%
heat energy wasted / minute = Heat absorbed / minute – useful work done / minute
= 3.6 × 109 – 5.4 × 108 = 109 (3.6 – 0.54)
= 3.06 × 109

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 8.
An electric heater supplies heat to a system at a rate of 100W. If system performs work at a rate of 75 joules per second. At what rate is the internal energy increasing ?
Solution:
Heat supplied, ∆Q = 100 w = 100 J/s
Useful workdone ∆w = 75 J/s
Increase in internal energy/ sec, ∆u = ?
As ∆Q = ∆u + ∆w
∴ ∆u = ∆Q – ∆w
= 100 – 75 = 25 J/S

Question 9.
A thermodynamic system is taken from an original state to an intermediate state by the linear process shown in Fig.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics 8
Its volume is then reduced to the original value form E to F by an isobaric process. Calculate the total work done by the gas from D to E to F
Solution:
A is clear from fig.
Change in pressure dp = EF = 5.0 – 2.0
= 3.0 atm = 3.0 × 1015 Nm-2
Change in volume dv = DF = 600 – 300
= 300 cc = 300 × 10-6 m3
Workdone by the gas from D to E to F = area of ∆DEF
w = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × DF × EF
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (300 × 10-6 ) × (3.0 × 105 ) = 45 J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 13 Thermodynamics

Question 10.
A refrigerator is to maintain eatables kept inside at 9°C. If room temperature is 36°C. calculate the coefficient of performance.
Solution:
Here T1 = 36°C = 36 + 273 = 309 K
T2 = 10°C = 10 + 273 = 283 K
COP = \(\frac{T_2}{T_1-T_2}=\frac{283}{309-283}\)
= \(\frac{283}{26}\) = 10.9

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 12th Lesson Thermal Properties of Matter Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 12th Lesson Thermal Properties of Matter

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Distinguish between heat and temperature. [T.S. Mar. 15]
Answer:
Heat

  1. It is a form of energy.
  2. It is the cause on the body.
  3. It is determined with calorimeter.
  4. It’s unit is Joule and Calories.

Temperature

  1. It is a degree of hotness or coldness of a body.
  2. It is an effect on a body.
  3. It is measured with thermometer.
  4. It’s unit is degree’Celsius or Kelvin or degree Fahrenheit.

Question 2.
What are the lower and upper fixing points in Celsius and Fahrenheit scales ? [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
In Celsius scale, lower fixed point is ice point or 0°C and upper fixed point is steam point or 100°C. In Fahrenheit scale, lower fixed point is 32°F and upper fixed point is 212°F.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
Do the values of coefficients of expansion differ, when the temperatures are measured on Centigrade scale or on Fahrenheit scale ?
Answer:
Yes. The coefficients of expansion depends on scale of temperature because
\(\frac{\alpha}{{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}=\frac{9}{5} \alpha /{ }^{\circ} \mathrm{F}\)

Question 4.
Can a substance contract on heating ? Give an example.
Answer:
Yes. Rubber, type metal, cast iron contract on heating.

Question 5.
Why gaps are left between rails on a railway track ? [A.P. Mar. 17, 16]
Answer:
The length of the rails increases in summer due to high temperature. Therefore a gap is left to allow this expansion.

Question 6.
Why do liquids have no linear and areal expansions ?
Answer:
Liquids occupy the same shape of vessel. They do not have individual length and area. Hence, liquids have no linear and areal expansions.

Question 7.
What is latent heat of fusion ?
Answer:
The amount of heat per unit mass required to change a substance from solid into liquid at the same temperature and pressure is called the latent heat of fusion (Lf).

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 8.
What is latent heat of vapourisation ? [Mar. 13]
Answer:
The amount of heat per unit mass required to change a substance from the liquid to the vapour state at the same temperature and pressure is called the latent heat of vaporisation (Lv).

Question 9.
What is specific gas constant ? Is it same for all gases ?
Answer:
Universal gas constant per molecular mass is called specific gas constant.
i.e., r = \(\frac{\mathrm{R}}{\mathrm{m}}\). No, it is different for different gases.

Question 10.
What are the units and dimensions of specific gas constant ?
Answer:
The units of specific gas constant is J/Kg/K. Dimensional formula is (m0.L2t-2K1).

Question 11.
Why utensils are coated black ? Why the bottom of the utensils are made of copper ?
Answer:

  1. Utensils are coated black, because it is a good absorber of heat.
  2. Copper is a good conductor of heat. So, copper is used at the bottom of cooking utensils.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 12.
State Weins displacement law. [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
The wavelength (λm) corresponding to maximum energy emitted by a black body is inversely proportional to its absolute temperature
i.e., λm ∝ \(\frac{1}{T}\)

Question 13.
Ventilators are provided in rooms just below the roof. Why ? [Mar. 14]
Answer:
Ventilators are provided in rooms just below the roof, because the hot air escapes out and fresh air enters into the rooms due to convection.

Question 14.
Does a body radiate heat at 0 K ? Does it radiate heat at 0°C ?
Answer:

  1. No. A body does not radiate heat at 0k.
  2. Yes. A body radiate heat at 0°C.

Question 15.
State the different modes of transmission of heat. Which of these modes require medium ?
Answer:
The different modes of transmission are : 1) conduction 2) convection and 3) radiation.
Among three modes conduction and convection require medium.

Question 16.
Define coefficient of thermal conductivity and temperature gradient.
Answer:
Coefficient of thermal conductivity : It is defined as the quantity of heat energy flowing per second between the opposite faces of cube of unit side, which are maintained at unit temperature difference.
Temperature gradient: The change of temperature per unit length of conductor is called temperature gradient.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 17.
What is thermal resistance of a conductor ? On what factors does it depend ?
Answer:
The resistance offered by the conductor for the flow of heat is called thermal resistance (R) of the conductor. R = \(\frac{\mathrm{d}}{\mathrm{kA}}\). It depends on

  1. The nature of the material, i.e., thermal conductivity (K).
  2. d; length of conductor along which heat flows and
  3. A; area of cross section of the conductor.

Question 18.
State the units and dimensions of coefficient of convection.
Answer:
The unit of coefficient of convection is, wm-2k-1.
Dimensional formula (m.L0T3θ-1).

Question 19.
Define emissive power and emissivity ?
Answer:
Emissive power : The energy flux emitted by unit surface area of a radiating body is known as emissive power (eλ).

Missivity (e): It is defined as the ratio of the emissive power of the body to that of black body at the same temperature.

Question 20.
What is greenhouse effect ? Explain global warming. [A.P. Mar. 15, 13]
Answer:
Greenhouse effect: When the earth receives sun light, it gets heated up and emits infrared radiation into air. CO2, CH4, N2O, O3, Chlorofluoro carbon (green house gases) present in the air absorbs the heat content of infrared radiation and keeps the earth warm. This is called green house effect.

Global warming : As CO2 content increases, more heat is retained in the atmosphere and the temperatures all over the world increases. This is called global warming.

Effects : a) Polar ice caps melt and fed more water in rivers and seas results in severe floods, b) In some areas, water resources dry up leading to drought conditions.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 21.
Define absorptive power of a body. What is the absorptive power of a perfect black body ?
Answer:
Absorptive power : At a given temperature and wavelength, the ratio of the amount of radiant energy absorbed to the amount of radiant energy incident in a wavelength range is called the absorptive power at that temperature and wavelength. Absorptive power of a perfect black body is 1.

Question 22.
State Newton’s law of cooling. [A.P. Mar. 18, 16; T.S. Mar. 18]
Answer:
The rate of loss of heat is directly proportional to the difference in temperature between the body and its surroundings provided the temperature difference is small. i.e., – \(\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}} \alpha\left(\mathrm{T}_B-\mathrm{T}_{\mathrm{S}}\right)\)

Question 23.
State the conditions under which Newton’s law of cooling is applicable.
Answer:

  1. Loss of heat is negligible by conduction and only when it is due to convection.
  2. Loss of heat occurs in a streamlined flow of air i.e., forced convection.
  3. Temperature of the body is uniformly distributed over it.

Question 24.
The roof of buildings are often painted white during summer. Why ? [T.S. Mar. 17, 15]
Answer:
The roof of buildings are painted white during summer, because it reflects more heat radiations and absorbs less heat radiations. Hence we feel comfort inside the house.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Explain Celsius and Fahrenheit scales of temperature. Obtain the relation between Celsius and Fahrenheit scales of temperature.
Answer:
Centigrade (Celsius) scale of temperature: In the Celsius scale of temperature, the lower fixed point is called the ice point and is assigned the value 0°C. The upper fixed point is called the steam point and is assigned the value 100°C. The interval between these two points (i.e., 100°C – 0 = 100°C) is subdivided into 100 equal parts each one corresponding to 1°C.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 1
Fahrenheit scale of temperature : In the Fahrenheit scale of temperature, the lower fixed point is the ice point and is assigned a value 32°F and the upper fixed point is the staempoint and is assigned a value 212°F. The interval between these two points (i.e., 212°F – 32°F = 180°F) is subdivided into 180 equal parts, each one corresponding to 1°F.

Fahrenheit scale of temperature : In the Fahrenheit scale of temperature, the lower fixed point is the ice point and is assigned a value 32°F and the upper fixed point is the staempoint and is assigned a value 212°F. The interval between these two points (i.e., 212°F – 32°F = 180°F) is subdivided into 180 equal parts, each one corresponding to 1°F.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 2
Relation between Celsius and Fahreinheit scales of temperature:
Difference of 100 Celsius degrees = Difference of 180 Fahrenheit degress
When the temperature of a body is measured on both the Celsius and Fahrenheit scales, let the readings be tC and tF respectively. Then
\(\frac{t_c-0}{t^{100}}=\frac{t_F-32}{180} \Rightarrow \frac{t_C}{5}=\frac{t_F-32}{9}\)
C = \(\frac{5}{9}\) (F – 32)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 2.
Two identical rectangular strips, one of copper and the other of steel, are riveted together to form a compound bar. What will happen on heating ?
Answer:
Bimetallic strip:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 3
Two similar strips of copper and steel are revitted side by side as a compound strip called bimetallic strip. It is straight at ordinary temperatures. When the bimetallic strip is heated, copper expands more than steel. So, it bends with copper on convex side. When the bimetallic strip is cooled below room temperature, copper contracts more than steel and it bends with copper on concave side. Bimetallic strip is used in refrigerators, automatic iron, fire alarm etc.

Question 3.
Pendulum clocks generally go fast in winter and slow in summer. Why ?
Answer:
The time period of a pendulum at t1°C is T1 = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{L_1}{g}}\) ………….. (1)
Where L1 is length of pendulum at t1°C.
If L2 is length of pendulum at t2°C,
then T2 = 2π \(\sqrt{\frac{L_2}{g}}\) ………………. (2)
\(\frac{(2)}{(1)}\) gives \(\frac{T_2}{T_1}=\sqrt{\frac{L_2}{L_1}}=\sqrt{\frac{L_1(1+\alpha t)}{L_1}}\)
Where a is the linear coefficient of expansion of pendulum clock. Where t = t2 – t1
\(\frac{T_2}{T_1}=\sqrt{(1+\alpha t)}=(1+\alpha t)^{\frac{1}{2}}\)
\(\frac{T_2}{T_1}=1+\frac{\alpha t}{2}\)
\(\frac{T_2}{T_1}-1=\frac{\alpha t}{2}\)
\(\frac{T_2-T_1}{T_1}=\frac{\alpha t}{2}\)
\(\frac{T_2-T_1}{T_1}\) = time lost by pendulum per second.
Due to expansion in length, during summer, time period increases or the clock looses time in summer. In winter due to fall in temperature, the length contracts, time period decreases, hence clock gains time.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 4.
In what way is the anomalous behaviour of water advantageous to acquatic animals ? [A.P. Mar. 18, Mar. 14]
Answer:
In cold countries, as atmospheric temperature decreases, the upper layers of the lakes, rivers etc., cool, contract and sink to the bottom (fig). This goes on until the whole of the water reaches the temperature of 4°C. When the top layers cool further temperature falls below 4°C, it expands and becomes lighter. It does not sink downwards and remains at the top. With further cooling the top layer gradually form ice at the top (fig). Ice and water are bad conductors of heat. So the lower layers are protected against freezing by the layers of ice and cold water at 1°C, 2°C and 3°C. This results in water remaining at the bottom at 4°C. So that aquatic animals survive in those layers of water.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 4

Question 5.
Explain conduction, convection and radiation with examples. [TS – Mar. ’18, ’16, ’15; AP – Mar. ’15]
Answer:
The heat is transmitted in three types. They are 1) Conduction 2) Convection 3) Radiation.

  1. Conduction : The process of transmission of heat from one place to other without actual movement of the particles of the medium is called conduction.
    Ex : When long iron rod is heated at one end, heat transmits to the other end.
  2. Convection : The process of transmission of heat from one place to another by the actual
    movement of the particles is called convection.
    Ex. : If water in a beaker is heated, the particles of water at the bottom receive the heat first. These particles expand, become lighter and rise up. At the same time colder and denser particles reach the bottom. They get in their turn heated and move up. This process is known as convection.
  3. Radiation : The process of transmission of heat from one place to another without any intervening medium is called radiation.
    Ex. : Earth receives heat radiations from the sun.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Boyle’s law and charle’s law. Hence, derive ideal gas equation which of two laws is better for the purpose of Thermometry and why ?
Answer:
P ∝ \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{V}}\)
⇒ PV = constants ⇒ P1V1 – P2V2
Charles law at constant volume : At constant volume the pressure of given mass of a gas is directly proportional to absolute temperature of gas.
P ∝ T
⇒ \(\frac{P}{T}\) = constant ⇒ \(\frac{P_1}{T_1}=\frac{P_2}{T_2}\)
Charles law at constant pressure : At constant pressure the volume of given mass of gas is directly proportional to absolute temperature.
V ∝ T
⇒ \(\frac{V}{T}\) = constant ⇒ \(\frac{V_1}{T_1}=\frac{V_2}{T_2}\)
Ideal gas equation : A gas which obeys all the gas laws at all temperature and all pressures is called an ideal gas.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 5
Consider are mole of a gas initially at a pressure P1 volume V1 and temperature T1 and Let P2, V2 and T2 be the final pressure, volume and absolute temperature T2.
From Boyle’s law, P1V1 = P2V2
⇒ V = \(\frac{P_1 V_1}{P_2}\) ………….. (1)
Now the gas is heated at constant pressure P2, then its volume changes from V to V2 and temperature changes from T1 and T2.
From charles law, \(\frac{V}{T_1}=\frac{V_2}{T_2} \Rightarrow V=\frac{V_2 T_1}{T_2}\) ………….. (2)
From (1) & (2) \(\frac{P_1 V_1}{P_2}=\frac{V_2 T_1}{T_2} \Rightarrow \frac{P_1 V_1}{T_1}=\frac{P_2 V_2}{T_2}\)
⇒ \(\frac{P V}{T}\) = constant ⇒ \(\frac{P V}{T}\) = R
Where ‘R’ is coniversal gas constant.
⇒ PV = RT
From ‘n’ gram moles PV = nRT. This law is called ideal gas equation.
Out of Boyle’s law, charles law is better for the purpose of thermometry because with increasing temperature, pressure and volume of gas also increase.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 2.
Explain thermal conductivity and coefficient of thermal conductivity. A copper bar of thermal conductivity 401 W/(mK) has one end at 104°C and the other end at 24°C. The length of the bar is 0.10 m and the cross – sectional area is 1.0 × 10-6 m-2. What is the rate of heat conduction, along the bar ?
Answer:
Thermal conductivity : Thermal conductivity of a solid body is ability to conduct heat in the body. Coefficient of thermal conductivity: The coefficient of thermal conductivity of a material may be defined as the quantity of heat energy flowing per second between the opposite faces of the cube of unit side, which are maintained at unit temperature difference.

Explanation of conduction : In steady state, conduction between the opposite faces which are at temperatures θ1°C and θ2°C separated by distance d is

  1. Directly proportional to area of cross section of the rod.
    Directly proportional to temperature difference (θ2 – θ1) between the opposite faces.
  2. Time of flow of heat, t
  3. Inversely proportional to the separation of faces ‘d’.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 6
    ∴ Q ∝ \(\frac{\mathrm{A}\left(\theta_2-\theta_1\right) t}{\mathrm{~d}}\)
    or Q = \(\frac{K A\left(\theta_2-\theta_1\right) t}{d}\)
    K is called coefficient of thermal conductivity of the material.
    When A = 1; (θ2 – θ1) = 1; t = 1; d = 1
    ∴ K = Q

Problem:
Kc = 401 W/mK, θ2 = 104°C, θ2 = 24°C, d = 0.10 m, A = 1.6 × 10-6 m-2
Rate of heat conduction = \(\frac{Q}{t}=K_c A \frac{\left(\theta_2-\theta_1\right)}{d}\)
= 401 × 1 × 10-6 × (104-24) = 0.32 W

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
State and explain Newton’s law of cooling. State the conditions under which Newton’s law of cooling is applicable. A body cools down from 60°C to 50°C in 5 minutes and to 40°C in another 8 minutes. Find the temperature of the surroundings.
Answer:
Expression for Newton’s law of cooling : Consider a hot body at temperature T. Let T0 be the temperature of its surroundings. According to Newton’s law of cooling,
Rate of loss of heat ∝ Temperature difference between the body and its surroundings.
\(\frac{-\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ∝ (T – T0)
\(\frac{-\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k (T – T0) ⇒ (1) where k is proportionality constant. Let m be the mass and C the specific heat of the body at temperature T. If the temperature of the body falls by small amount dT in time dt, then the amount of heat lost is
dQ = mc dT
∴ Rate of loss of heat is given by
\(\frac{\mathrm{dQ}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = mc \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) ………….. (2)
putting (2) in (1) ⇒
-mc \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = k(T – T0)
\(\frac{\mathrm{dT}}{\mathrm{dt}}=\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{mc}}\) (T – T0) = -K(T – T0)
where K = \(\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{mc}}\) is another constant.
⇒ \(\frac{d T}{\left(T-T_0\right)}\) = – K dt
on integrating both sides, we get
\(\int \frac{d T}{\left(T-T_0\right)}=-K \int d t\)
loge (T – T0) = – Kt + c …………… (3)
T – T0 = e-Kt + c
T = T0 + ec e-Kt
T = T0 + Ce-Kt ……………… (4)
Where c is integration constant and C = ec
equations (1), (2), (3) and (4) are the different expressions for Newton’s law of cooling.

Explanation of Graphs:
1) If we plot a graph by taking equation (4) different values of temperature difference ∆T = T – T0 along y – axis and the corresponding values of t along X – axis, we get a curve of the form shown in figure. It clearly shows that the rate of cooling is higher initially and then decreases as the temperature of the body falls.
Curve showing cooling of hot water with time.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 7
2) More over, the equation (3) is of the form y = mx + c. So if we plot a graph, by taking loge(T – T0) along Y – axis and time t along x – axis, we must get a straight line, as shown in figure. It has a negative slope equal to – K and intercept on Y – axis equal to C.
In both of the above situations, Newton’s law of cooling stands verified.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 8
Newton’s law of cooling is applicable :

  1. Loss of heat is negligible by conduction and only when it is due to convection.
  2. Loss of heat occurs in a stream lined flow of air i.e., forced convection.
  3. Temperature of the body is uniformly distributed over it.
  4. Temperature differences are moderate i.e., upto 30 K, however if heat body is due to forced convection the law is valid for large differences of temperature also.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 9
    ∴ Surrounding temperature, θ0 = \(\frac{85^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{3}\) = 28.33°C

Problems

Question 1.
What is the temperature for which the readings on Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales are same?
Answer:
The relation between Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales is given by
\(\frac{K-273.15}{100}=\frac{F-32}{180}\)
but K = F
\(\frac{F-273.15}{100}=\frac{F-32}{180}\)
F – 273.15 = \(\frac{5}{9}\) F – \(\frac{160}{9}\)
F – \(\frac{5}{9}\) F = 273.15 – \(\frac{160}{9}\)
= 273.15 – 17.77
\(\frac{4F}{9}\) = 255.38
∴ F = \(\frac{9}{4}\) (255.38)
= 574.6°F

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 2.
Find the increase in temperature of aluminium rod if its length ¡s to be increased by 1%. (a for aluminium = 25 × 10-6/0 C). [A.P (Mar. ‘15)]
Answer:
Percentage increase in length = \(\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1}\) × 100
= α(t2 – t1) × 100 [∵ \(\frac{l_2-l_1}{l_1}\) = α(t2 – t1)]
Here, percentage increase in length = 1,
α = 25 × 10-6/ °C
1 = 25 × 10-6(t2 – t1) × 100
t2 – t1 = \(\frac{1}{25 \times 10^{-4}}=\frac{10^4}{25}\) = 400°C

Question 3.
How much steam at 100°C is to be passed into water of mass 100 g at 20°C to raise its temperature by 5°C ? (Latent heat of steam is 540 cal/g and specific heat of water is 1 cal/g°C).
Answer:
In the method of mixtures,
Heat lost by steam = Heat gained by water
mSLS + mSS(100 – 1) = mWS (t – 20)
Where mS is the mass of steam, LS is the latent heat of steam, S is the specific heat of steam and mW is the mass of water.
Here, LS = 540 cal/g
S = 1 cal/g°C;
mW = 100 g
t = 20 + 5 = 25°C
mS × 540 + mS × 1 × (100 – 25) = 100 × 1 × (25 – 20)
615 mS = 500
mS = \(\frac{500}{615}\)
= 0.813 g.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 4.
2 kg of air is heated at constant volume. The temperature of air is increased from 293 K to 313 K. If the specific heat of air at constant volume is 0.718 kJ/kgK, find the amount of heat absorbed in kJ and kcal.
(J = 4.2 kJ/kcal).
Answer:
Here, M = 2 kg
dT = 313- 293 = 20 K
CV = 0.718 × 103 J/Kg – K
J = 4.2 KJ/Kcal
CV = \(\frac{1}{\mathrm{~m}} \frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}\)
dθ = mCVdT
= 0.718 × 103 × 2 × 20
= 28720 J
dθ = 28.72 KJ
dθ = \(\frac{28720}{4.2 \times 10^3}\)
= 6.838 Kcal.

Question 5.
A dock, with a brass pendulum, keeps correct time at 20°C, but loses 8.212 s per day, when the temperature rises to 30°C. Calculate the coefficient of linear expansion of brass.
Answer:
Here t1 = 20°C, t2 = 30°C
Loss of time per day = 8.212 sec
Loss of time per day = \(\frac{1}{2}\) α (t2 – t1) × 86,400
8.212 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) α (30 – 20) × 86,400
∴ α = \(\frac{16.424}{864 \times 10^3}\)
= 19 × 10-6/C°

Question 6.
A body cools from 60°C to 40°C in 7 minutes. What will be its temperature after next 7 minutes if the temperature of its surroundings is 10°C ?
Answer:
Rate of cooling \(\frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = K(θav – θ0)
Case (i) :
Given, .
θ1 = 60°C, θ2 = 40°C, θ0 = 10°C, t = 7 min
⇒ \(\frac{60^{\circ} \mathrm{C}-40^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{7}=K\left[\frac{60^{\circ} \mathrm{C}+40^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{2}-10^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\right]\)
\(\frac{20}{7}\) = K[50 – 10]
⇒ \(\frac{20}{7}\) = K × 40
∴ K = \(\frac{1}{14}\) ……………. (1)

Case (ii) :
Given,
θ1 = 40°C, θ0 = 10°C, t = 7 min, θ2 = ?
⇒ \(\frac{40-\theta_2}{7}=K\left[\frac{40+\theta_2}{2}-10\right]\)
\(\frac{40-\theta_2}{7}=\frac{1}{14}\left[\frac{40+\theta_2}{2}-10\right]\)
80 – 2θ2 = \(\frac{40+\theta_2-20}{2}\)
160 – 4θ2 = 20 + θ2
2 = 140
∴ θ2 = \(\frac{140}{5}\) = 28°C

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
If the maximum intensity of radiation for a black body is found at 2.65 pm what is the temperature of the radiating body ? (Wien’s constant = 2.9 × 10-3 mK)
Answer:
λmax = 2.65 pm = 2.65 × 10-6m
Wien’s constant (b) = 2.90 × 10-3 mk
λmax T = b(constant)
T = \(\frac{b}{\lambda_{\max }}=\frac{2.9 \times 10^{-3}}{2.65 \times 10^{-6}}\)
= 1094 K.

Additional Problems

Question 1.
The triple points of neon and carbon dioxide are 24.57 K and 216.55 K respectively. Express these temperatures on the Celsius and Fahrenheit scales.
Answer:
Relation between kelvin scale and Celsius scale is TC = TK – 273.15
Where TC.TK = temperature on Celsius and kelvin scales respectively
For Neon TC = 24.57 – 273.15 = – 248.58°C
For CO2 TC = 216.55 – 273.15 = -56.60°C
Relation between Kelvin and Fahrenheit scales is
\(\frac{T_F-32}{180}=\frac{T_K-273.15}{100}\)
TF = \(\frac{180}{100}\) (TK – 273.15) + 32
FQ or Neon TF
= \(\frac{180}{100}\)(24.57 – 273.15) + 32 = – 415.44° F
FQ or CO2 TF = \(\frac{180}{100}\) (216.55 – 273.15) + 32
= – 69.88° F

Question 2.
Two absolute scales A and B have triple points of water defined to be 200 A and 350 B. What is the relation between TA and TB ?
Answer:
Given triple point of water on scale A = 200
A triple point of water on scale B = 350 B
As per question 200 A = 350, B = 273.16 K
(Or)
IA = \(\frac{273.16}{200}\) K and IB = \(\frac{273.16}{350}\) K
If TA and TB represent the triple point of water on two scales A and B then
\(\frac{273.16}{200}\) TA = \(\frac{273.16}{350}\)TB (Or) \(\frac{T_A}{T_B}=\frac{200}{350}=\frac{4}{7}\)
(Or) TA = \(\frac{4}{7}\) TB

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
The electrical resistance in ohms of a certain thermometer varies with temperature according to the approximate law:
R = R0[1 + α(T – T0)]
The resistance is 101.6 Ω at the triple-point of water 273.16 K and 165.5 Ω at the normal melting point of lead (600.5 K). What is the temperature when the resistance is 123.4 Ω ?
Answer:
Here, R0 = 101. 6 Ω, T0 = 273.16 K
Case (i) R1 = 165.5 Ω, T1 = 600.5 K
Case (ii) R2 = 123.4 Ω; T2 = ?
Using the relation R = R0(1 + α(T – T0))
Case (i):
165.5 = 101.6(1 + α(600.5-273.16))
α = \(\frac{165.5-101.6}{101.6 \times(600.5-273.16)}\)
= \(\frac{63.9}{101.6 \times 327.34}\)

Case (ii): 123.4 = 101.6(1 + α(T2 – 273.16))
(Or)
123.4 = 101.6
(1 + \(\frac{63.9}{101.6 \times 327.34}\) (T2 – 273.16))
= 101.6 + \(\frac{63.9}{327.34}\) (T2 – 273.16)
T2 = \(\frac{(123.4-101.6) \times 327.34}{63.9}\) + 273.16
= 111.67 + 273.16 = 384.83 K

Question 4.
Answer the following :
a) The triple-point of water is a standard fixed point in modern thermometry. Why? What is wrong in taking the melting point of ice and the boiling point of water as standard fixed points (as was originally done in the Celsius scale) ?
b) There were two fixed points in the original Celsius scale as mentioned above which were assigned the number 0°C and 100°C respectively. On the absolute scale, one of the fixed points is the triple-point of water, which on the Kelvin absolute scale is assigned the number 273.16 K. What is the other fixed point on this (Kelvin) scale ?
c) The absolute temperature (Kelvin scale) T is related to the temperature tC on the Celsius scale by
tc = T – 273.15
Why do we have 273.15 in this relation and not 273.16 ?
Answer:
a) This is on account of the fact that the triple point of water has a unique value i.e., 273.16 K at a unique point, where exists unique values of pressure and volume. On the other hand, the melting point of ice and boiling point of water do not have unique set of value as they change in pressure and volume.

b) The other fixed point on the absolute scale is the absolute zero itself.

c) On Celsius 0°C corresponds to melting points of ice of normal pressure. The corresponding value of absolute temperature is 273.15 K. The temperature 273.16 K corresponds to the triple point of water.
From the given relation the corresponding value of triple point of water on Celsius scale
= 273.16 – 273. 15 = 0.01°C.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 5.
Two. ideal gas thermometers A and B use oxygen and hydrogen respectively. The following observations are made :
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 10
a) What is the absolute temperature of normal melting point of sulphur as read by thermometers A and B?
b) What do you think is the reason behind the slight difference in answers of thermoineters A and B ? (The thermometers are not faulty). What further procedure is needed in the experiment to reduce the discrepancy between the two readings ?
Answer:
a). Let T be the melting point of sulphur, for water Ttr = 273.16 K
For thermometer A, T = P/Ptr × 273.16
= \(\frac{1.797 \times 10^5}{1.250 \times 10^5}\) × 273.16 = 392.69 K
For thermometer B, T = P/Ptr × 273.16
= \(\frac{0.287 \times 10^5}{0.200 \times 10^5}\) × 273.16 = 391.98 K

b) The cause of slight different answers is that the oxygen and hydrogen gases are not perfectly ideal. To reduce this discrepancy, the readings should be at lower and lower pressure as in that case, the gases approach to the ideal gas behaviour.

Question 6.
A steel tape 1 m long is correctly calibrated for a temperature of 27.0°C. The length of a steel rod measured by this tape is found to be 63.0 cm on a hot day when the temperature is 45.0°C. What is the actual length of the steel rod on that day ? What is the length of the same steel rod on a day when the temperature is 27.0°C ? Coefficient of linear expansion of steel = 1.20 × 10-5 K-1.
Answer:
Length of steell tape at 27°C is 100 cm i.e.
L = 100 cm and T = 27°C
The length of steel tape at 45°C is L1 = L + ∆L
= L + αL∆T
= 100 + (1.20 × 10-5) × 100 × (45° – 27)
= 100.0216 cm
Length of 1 cm mark at 27°C on this scale, at 45°C
= 100.0216/100 cm
Length of 63 cm measured’ by this tape at 45°C will be
= \(\frac{100.0216}{100}\) × 63 = 63.0136 cm
Length of the same steel rod on a day when the temperature is 27°C = 63 × 1 = 63 cm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
A large steel wheel is to be fitted on to a shaft of the same material. At 27°C, the outer diameter of the shaft is 8.70 cm and the diameter of the central hole in the wheel is 8.69 cm. The shaft is cooled using ‘dry ice’. At what temperature of the shaft does the wheel slip on the shaft ? Assume coefficient of linear expansion of the steel to be constant over the required temperature range :
αsteel = 1.20 × 10-5K-1.
Answer:
Here T1 = 27°C = 27 + 273 = 300 K
Length at temperature, T1K = LT1 = 8.70 cm
Length at temperature, T2K = LT2 – 8.69 cm
Change in length = LT2 – LT1 = LT2 α(T2 – T2)
Or 8.69 – 8.70 = 8.70 × (1.20 × 10-5) × (T2 – 300)
Or T2 – 300 = \(\frac{0.01}{8.70 \times 1.2 \times 10^{-5}}\) = -95.8
Or T2 = 300 – 95.8 = 204.2 K = -68.8°C

Question 8.
A hole is drilled in a copper sheet. The diameter of the hole is 4.24 cm at 27.0°C. What is the change in the diameter of the hole when the sheet is heated to 227°C ? Coefficient of linear expansion of copper = 1.70 × 10-5K-1.
Answer:
In this problem superfical expansion of copper sheet will be involved on heating. Here, area of hole at 227°C, then area of the hole at 227°C,
S2 = \(\frac{\pi \mathrm{D}_2^2}{4}\)cm2.
Coefficient of superficial expansion of copper is β = 2α = 2 × 1.70 × 10-5 = 3.4 × 10-5 c1
Increase in area = S2 – S1 = βS1 ∆T (or)
S2 = S1 + βS1 ∆T
= S1(1 + β∆T)
(Or)
\(\frac{\pi \mathrm{D}_2^2}{4}=\frac{\pi}{4}\) (4.24)2 [1 + 3.4 × 10-5 (228 – 27)]
(Or)
D22 = (4.24)2 × 1.0068
D2 = 4.2544 cm
Change in diameter = D2 – D1
= 4.2544 – 4.24
= 0.0144 cm.

Question 9.
A brass wire 1.8 m long at 27°C is held taut with little tension between two rigid supports. If the wire is cooled to a temperature of -39°C, what is the tension developed in the wire, if its diameter is 2.0 mm ? Co-efficient of linear expansion of brass = 2.0 × 10-5K-1; Young’s modulus of brass = 0.91 × 1011 Pa.
Answer:
Here L = 1.8m, T1 = 27°C, T2 = -39°C, r = 1
mm = 10-3m, F = ?
α = 2 × 10-5C-1, y = 0.91 × 1011 N/m2
From y = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{a \Delta L}\), ⇒ ∆L = \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{ay}}\)
Also ∆L = αL∆T = ∴ \(\frac{\mathrm{FL}}{\mathrm{ay}}\) = αL∆T
(Or) F = α∆Tay = α(T2 – T1) πr2y
= 2 × 10-5 × (-39 – 27) × (10-3)2 × 0.91 × 1011
= -3.77 × 10-2 N
Negative sign indicates that the force is inward due to contraction of the wire.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 10.
A brass rod of length 50 cm and diameter 3.0 mm is joined to a steel rod of the same length and diameter. What is the change in length of the combined rod at 250°C, if the original lengths are at 40.0°C ? Is there a ‘thermal stress’ developed at the junction ? The ends of the rod are free to expand (Co-efficient of linear expansion of brass = 2,0 × 10-5K-1, steel = 1.2 × 10-5K-1.
Answer:
∆L1 = L1α1∆T = 50 × (2.10 × 10-5) (250 – 40) = 0.2205 cm
∆L2 = L2α2∆T
= 50 × (1.2 × 10-5) (250 – 40) = 0.216 cm
∴ Change in length of combined rod
= ∆L1 + ∆L2
= 0.220 + 0.126 = 0.346 cm

Question 11.
The coefficient of volume expansion of glycerin is 49 × 10-5K-1. What is the fractional change in its density for a 30°C rise in temperature ?
Answer:
Here r = 49 × 10-5C-1, ∆T = 30°C .
As V1 = V + ∆V = V(1 + r∆T)
∴ V1 = V(1 + 49 + 10-5 × 30) = 1.0147 V
As P = \(\frac{m}{V}\), p1 = \(\frac{m}{V^1}\) = \(\frac{\mathrm{m}}{1.0147 \mathrm{~V}}\)= 09855 P
Fractional change in density = \(\frac{\rho-\rho^{\prime}}{\rho}\)
= \(\frac{\rho-0.9855 \rho}{\rho}\)
= 0.0145

Question 12.
A 10 kW drilling machine is used to drill a bore in a small aluminium block of mass 8.0 kg. How much is the rise in temperature of the block in 2.5 minutes, assuming 50% of power is used up in heating the machine itself or lost to the surroundings. Specific heat of aluminium = 0.91 Jg-1K-1.
Answer:
Here p = 10 kw = 105w,
Mass m = 8.0 kg = 8 × 103 g
Rise in temp; ∆T = ?
time t = 2.5 min = 2.5 × 60 sec
Sp. heat C = 0.91 Jg-1°C-1
Total energy = p × t = 104 × 150
= 15 × 105 J
As 50% of energy is lost
∴ Energy available ∆Q = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 15 × 105
= 7.5 × 105 J
As ∆Q = mc ∆T
∴ ∆T = \(\frac{\Delta Q}{\mathrm{mc}}=\frac{7.5 \times 10^5}{8 \times 10^3 \times 0.91}\) = 103°C

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 13.
A copper block of mass 2.5 kg is heated in a furnace to a temperature of 500°C and then placed on a large ice block. What is the maximum amount of ice that can melt ? (Specific heat of copper = 0.39 Jg-1K-1 heat of fusion of water = 335 Jg-1.
Answer:
Here, mass of copper block m = 2.5 kg = 2500 kg
Fall in temperature ∆T = 500 – 0 = 500°C
Specific heat of copper C = 0.39 Jg-1°C-1
Latent heat of fusion L = 335 Jg-1
Let the mass of ice melted by m1
As heat gained by ice = Heat lost by copper
m-1L = Mc∆T
m-1 = \(\frac{\mathrm{mC} \Delta \mathrm{T}}{\mathrm{L}}\)
m1 = \(\frac{2500 \times 0.39 \times 500}{335}\)
= 1500 g = 1.5 kg

Question 14.
In an experiment on the specific heat of a metal, a 0.20 kg block of the metal at 150°C is dropped in a copper calorimeter (of water equivalent 0.025 kg) containing 150 cm3 of water at 27°C. The final temperature is 40°C. Compute the specific heat of the metal. If heat losses to the surroundings are not negligible, is your answer greater or smaller than the actual value for specific heat of the metal ?
Answer:
Here, mass of metal, m = 0.20 kg = 200 g
Fall in temperature of metal ∆T = 150 – 40
= 110°C
If L is specific heat of metal, then heat lost by the metal
∆Q = mc∆T = 200 × L × 110
Volume of water = 150 C.C
Mass of water m1 = 150 g
Water equivalent of calorimeter, w = 0.025 kg = 25 kg
Rise in temp of water and calorimeter
∆T1 = 40 – 27 = 13°C
Heat gained by water and calorimeter,
∆Q1 = (m1 + w)T1
= (150 + 25) × 13 = 175 × 13
As ∆Q = ∆Q1
∴ From (i) and (ii)
200 × C × 110 = 175 × 13
C = \(\frac{175 \times 13}{200 \times 110}\) ≈ 0.1
(Or)
If some heat is lost to the sorroundings, value of L is so obtained will be less than the actual value of L.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 15.
Given below are observations on molar specific heats at room temperature of some common gases.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 11
The measured molar specific heats of these gases are markedly different from those for monatomic gases. Typically, molar specific heat of a monatomic gas is 2.92 cal/mol K. Explain this difference. What can you infer from the somewhat larger (than the rest) value for chlorine ?
Answer:
The gases which are listed in the above table are diatomic gases and not mono atomic gases. For diatomic gases, molar specific heat
= \(\frac{5}{2}\) R = \(\frac{5}{2}\) × 1.98 = 4.95, which agrees fairly well with all observations listed in the . table except for chlorine. A monoatomic gas molecules has only the transnational motion. A diatomic gas molecules, a part from translation motion. The vibrational as well as rotational motion is also possible. Therefore to raise the temperature of 1 mole of diatomic gas through 1°C heat is also to be supplied increase not only translation energy but also rotational and vibrational energies. Hence molar specific heat of diatomic gas is greater than that for monoatomic gas. The higher value of molar specific heat of chlorine as compared to hydrogen, nitrogen, oxygen etc. Shows that for chlorine molecule, at room temperature vibrational motion. Also occurs along with translational and rotational motions. Where as other diatomic molecules at room temperature usually have rotational motion apart from their translational motion. This the reason that chlorine has some what larger value of molar specific heat.

Question 16.
Answer the following questions based on the P-T phase diagram of carbon dioxide :
a) At what temperature and pressure can the solid, liquid and vapour phases of CO2 co-exist in equilibrium ?
b) What is the effect of decrease of pressure on the fusion and boiling point of CO2 ?
c) What are the critical temperature and pressure for CO2 ? What is their significance ?
d) Is CO2 solid, liquid or gas at (a) – 70°C under 1 atm, (b) -60°C under 10 atm, (c) 15°C under 56 atm ?
Answer:
a) The solid, liquid and vapour phase of carbon dioxide exist in equilibrium at the point i.e., temperature = -56.6°C and pressure = 5.11 atm.

b) With the decrease in pressure, both the fusion and boiling point of carbondioxide will decrease.

c) For carbondioxide, the critical tempera-ture is 31,1°C and critical pressure is 73.0 atm. If the temp of CO2 is more than 31.1°C. It cannot be liquified, however large pressure we may apply.

d) Carbondioxide will be (a) a vapour at – 70°C under 1 atm (b) a solid at 6°C under 10 atm (c) a liquid at 15°C under 56 atm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 17.
Answer the following questions based on the P – T phase diagram of CO2 :
a) CO2 at 1 atm pressure and temperature – 60°C is compressed isothermally. Does it go through a liquid phase ?
b) What happens when CO2 at 4 atm pressure is cooled from room tem-perature at constant pressure ?
c) Describe qualitatively the changes in a given mass of solid CO2 at 10 atm pressure and temperature – 65°C as it is heated up to room temperature at constant pressure.
d) CO2 is heated to a temperature 70°C and compressed isothermally. What changes in its properties, do you expect to observe ?
Answer:
a) Since the temp – 60°C lies to the left of 56.6°C on the curve i.e. lies in the region of vapour and solid phase. So CO2 will condense directly into solid with out becoming liquid.

b) Since the pressure 4 atm is less than 5.11 atm. The carbondioxde will condenses directly into solid without becoming liquid.

c) When a solid CO2 at 10 atm. Pressure and -65°C temp is heated, It is first converted into a liquid. A further increase in temperature brings it to the vapour phase. At P = 10 atm. If a horizontal line is drawn parallel to the T-axis. Then the points of intersection of this line with the fusion and vapourisation curve will give the fu-sion and boiling point of CO2 at 10 atm.

d) Since 70°C is higher than the critical temperature of CO2. So the CO2 gas can not be converted into liquid state on being compressed isothermally at 70°C. It will remain in the vapour state. Nowever the gas will depart more and more now its perfect gas behavious with the increase in pressure.

Question 18.
A child running a temperature of 101 °F is given an antipyrin (i.e. a medicine that lowers fever) which causes an increase in the rate of evaporation of sweat from his body. If the fever is brought down to 98°F in 20 min, what is the average rate of extra evaporation caused, by the drug. Assume the evaporation mechanism to be the only way by which heat is lost. The mass of the child is 30 kg. The specific heat of human body is approximately the same as that of water and latent heat of evaporation of water at that temperature is about 580 cal g-1.
Answer:
Here fall in temp = ∆T = 101 – 98 = 3°F
= 3 × \(\frac{5}{3}\)°C = \(\frac{5}{3}\)°C
Mass of child M = 30 kg
Sp. heat of human body = Sp heat of water
C = 1000 cal.kg-1C-1
∴ Heat last by the body of child, ∆Q = mC∆T
= 30 × 1000 × \(\frac{5}{3}\) = 5000 calories
If m be the mass of water evapourated in 20 min then m1L = ∆Q
m1 = \(\frac{\Delta Q}{L}=\frac{5000}{580}\) = 86.2 g
∴ Average rate of extra evapouration = \(\frac{86.2}{20}\)
= 4.31 gmin-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 19.
A ‘thermacole’ icebox is a cheap and efficient method for storing small quantities of cooked food in summer in particular. A cubical icebox of side 30 cm has a thickness of 5.0 cm. If 4.0 kg of ice is put in the box, estimate the amount of ice remaining after 6 h. The outside temperature is 45°C and co-efficient of thermal conductivity of thermacole is 0.01 Js-1m-1 K-1. [Heat of fusion of wafer = 335 × 103 J kg-1]
Answer:
Here length of each side l = 30 cm = 0.3 m
Thickness of each side ∆x = 5 cm = 0.05 m
Total surface area through which heat enters into the box
A = 6 l2 = 6 × 0.3 × 0.3 = 0 Jum2
Temp.diff ∆T = 45 – 0 = 45°C,
K = 0.01 JS-1m-1°C-1
Time ∆T = 6 hrs = 6 × 60 × 60 S
Latent heat of fusion L = 335 × 103 J/kg
Let m be the mass of ice melted in this time
∆Q = mL = KA \(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\Delta \mathrm{x}}\right)\) ∆t
m = kA \(\left(\frac{\Delta T}{\Delta \mathrm{T}}\right) \frac{\Delta \mathrm{t}}{\mathrm{L}}\) = 0.01 × 0.54 × \(\frac{45}{0.05}\) × \(\frac{6 \times 60 \times 60}{335 \times 10^3}\) = 0.313 kg
Mass of ice left = 4 – 0.313 = 3.687 kg

Question 20.
A brass boiler has a base area of 0.15 m2 and thickness 1.0 cm. It boils water at the rate of 6.0 kg/min when placed on a gas stove. Estimate the temperature of the part of the flame in contact with the boiler. Thermal conductivity of brass = 109 Js-1m-1 K-1: Heat of vaporisation of water = 2256 × 103 Jkg-1.
Answer:
Were A = 0.15 m2 ∆x = 1.0 m = 10-2 m
\(\frac{\Delta Q}{\Delta t}=\frac{6 \times 10^3 \times 2256}{60}\) JS-1 = 2256 × 102 JS-1
K = 609 JS-1m-1°C-1, ∆T = (t – 100)
From \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{Q}}{\Delta \mathrm{t}}=\mathrm{KA}\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{T}}{\Delta \mathrm{x}}\right)\)
2256 × 102 = 609 × 0.15 \(\frac{(t-100)}{10^{-2}}\)
t – 100 = \(\frac{2256}{609 \times 0.15}\) = 2470 t
t = 24.70

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 21.
Explain why :
a) a body with large reflectivity is a poor emitter.
b) a brass tumbler feels much colder than a wooden tray on a chilly day.
c) an optical pyrometer (for measuring high temperatures) calibrated for an ideal black body radiation gives too low a value for the temperature of a red hot iron piece in the open, but gives a correct value for the temperature when the same piece is in the furnace.
d) the earth without its atmosphere would be inhospitably cold.
e) healting systems based on circulation of steam are more efficient in warming a building than those based on circulation of hot water.
Answer:
a) This is because a body with large refelectivity is a poor absorber of heat and poor absorbers of heat are poor imilters.

b) When we touch a brass tumbler on a chill day; heat flows from our body to the tumbler quickly cas thermal conductivity or brass is very high and as a result, it appears colder. On the other hand as the wood is bad conductor, heat does not flow to the wooden tray from our body, on touching it.

c) When the red hot iron pieces is in the oven, its temperature TK is the given by the relation.
E = αT4 But if the red hot iron piece is in the open having the surrounding temperature T0, its energy is radiated according to relation E1 = α(T4 – T40). As the working principle of optical pysometer is based on the fact that the brightness of – a glowing surface of a body depends , upon its temperature. Therefore, pysometes gives too low a value for the temperature of red iron in the open.

d) The lower layer’s of Earth’s atmosphere reflect infrared radiations from earth back to the surface of the earth. Thus the heat radiation recieved by the earth from the sun during the day are kept trapped by the atm. If atmosphere of earth were not there, its surface would become too cold to live.

e) Steam at 100°C possess more heat than the same mass of water at 100°C possess 540 calories of heat more than possessed by 1 gm of ware at 100°C. That is why heating systems based on circulation of stream are more efficient than those based on circulation of hot water.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 22.
A body cools from 80°C to 50°C in 5 minutes. Calculate the time it takes to cool from 60°C to 30°C. The temperature of the surroundings is 20°C.
Answer:
\(\frac{\mathrm{d} \theta}{\mathrm{dt}}\) = K [θav – θ0]
\(\frac{80-50}{5}\) = K(65 – 20)
⇒ \(\frac{30}{5}\) = K × 45 = K = \(\frac{2}{15}\)
\(\frac{60-30}{t}=\frac{2}{15}[45-20]\)
\(\frac{30}{t}=\frac{2}{15} \times 15\)
t = 5 min
Time of cooling is given by t = \(\frac{2.3026}{k}\) log10
\(\frac{T_1-T_0}{T_2-T_0}\)
As per question condition (i) T1 = 80°C, T2 = 50°C, T0 = 20°C, t = 5 min
5 × 60 = \(\frac{2.3026}{K} \log _{10} \frac{80-20}{50-20}\)
= \(\frac{2.3026}{k} \log _{10^2}\) ……………. (2)
As per question condition (i) T1 = 60°C, T2 = 30°C, T0 = 20°C, t = ?
t = \(\frac{2.3026}{K} \log _{10} \frac{60-20}{30-20}\)
= \(\frac{2.3026}{k} \log _{10^4}\) ……………. (3)
Div (3) by (2) we get
\(\frac{t}{5 \times 60}=\frac{\log _{10^4}}{\log _{10^2}}=\frac{0.6021}{0.3010}\) = 2
(Or) t = 5 × 60 × 2 = 10 × 60 s
= 10 min

Textual Examples

Question 1.
Show that the coefficient of areal expansions. (∆A/A)/∆T, of rectangular sheet of the solid is twice its linear expansivity, α1.
Answer:
∆A3 = (∆a) (∆b)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 12
When the temperature increases by ∆T, a increases by ∆a = α1a ∆T and b increases by ∆b = α1b ∆T. From fig. the increase in area
∆A = ∆A1 + ∆A2 + ∆A3
∆A = a ∆b + b ∆a + (∆a) (∆b)
= a α1b ∆T + b α1a ∆T + (α1)2 ab(∆T)2
= α1ab ∆T(2 + α1∆T)
= α1A ∆T(2 + α1∆T)
Since α1 = 10-5 K-1, from Table 12.1, the product α1∆T for fractional temperature is small in comparision with 2 and may be neglected.
Hence,
\(\left(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{A}}\right) \frac{1}{\Delta \mathrm{T}}\) ≈ 2α1

Question 2.
A blacksmith fixes iron ring on the rim of the wooden wheel of a bullock cart. The diametbr of the rim and the iron ring are 5.243 m and 5.231 m respectively at 27°C. To what temperature should the ring be heated so as to fit the rim of the wheel ?
Answer:
Given,
T1 = 27°C
LT1 = 5.231 m
LT2 = 5.243 m
So,
LT2 = LT1 [1 + α1(T2 – T1)]
5.243 m = 5.231 m[1 + 1.20 × 10-5 K-1 (T2 – 27°C)]
or T2 = 218°C

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 3.
A sphere of aluminium of 0.047 kg is placed for sufficient time in a vessel containing boiling water, so that the sphere is at 100°C. It is then immediately transfered to 0.14 kg copper calorimeter containing 0.25 kg of water at 20°C. The temperature of water rises and attains a steady state at 23°C. Calculate the specific heat capacity of aluminium.
Answer:
Mass of aluminium sphere (m.,) = 0.047 kg
Initial temp, of aluminium sphere = 100°C
Final temp. = 23°C
Change in temp. (∆T) = (100°C – 23°C)
= 77°C
Let specific heat capacity of aluminium be sAl. The amount of heat lost by the aluminium sphere = m1sAl ∆T = 0.047 kg × sAl × 77°C s ……………. (i)
Mass of water (m2) = 0.25 kg
Mass of calorimeter (m3) = 0.14 kg
Initial temp, of water and calorimeter = 20°C
Final temp, of the mixture = 23°C
Change in temp. (∆T2) = 23°C – 20°C = 3°C
Specific heat capacity of water (sw) from table
12.3 = 4.18 × 103 J kg-1 K-1
Specific heat capacity of copper calorimeter = 0.386 × 103 J kg-1 K-1
The amount of heat gained by water and calorimeter = m2sw ∆T2 + m3scu ∆T2 = (m2sw + m3scu) (∆T2)
= (0.25 kg × 4.18 × 103 J kg-1 K-1 + 0.14 kg × 0.386 × 103 J kg-1 K-1) (23°C – 20°C) ………………… (ii)
In the steady state heat lost by the aluminium sphere = heat gained by water + heat gained by calorimeter.
So, from (i) and (ii)
0.047 kg × sAl × 77°C = (0.25 kg × 4.18 × 103 J kg-1 K-1 + 0.14 kg × 0.386 × 103 J kg-1 K-1) (3°C)
sAl = 0.911 kJ kg-1 K-1

Question 4.
When 0.15 kg of ice of 0°C mixed with 0.30 kg of water at 50°C in a container, the resulting temperature is 6.7°C. Calculate the heat of fusion of ice.
(swater = 4186 J kg-1 K-1)
Answer:
Heat lost by water = mswf – θi)w
= (0.30 kg) (4186 kg-1 K-1) (50.0°C – 6.7°C)
= 54376.14 J
Heat required to melt ice = m2Lf = (0.15 kg) Lf
Heat required to raise temperature of ice water to final temperature
= mIswf – θi)I
= (0.15 kg) (4186 J kg-1 K-1) (6.7°C – 0°C)
= 4206.93 J
Heat lost = heat gained
54376.14 J = (0.15 Kg)Lf + 4206.93 J
Lf = 3.34 × 105 J kg-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 5.
Calculate the heat required to convert 3 kg of ice at -12°C kept in a calorimeter-to steam at 100°C at atmospheric pressure. Given specific heat capacity of ice = 2100 J kg-1 K-1, specific heat capacity of water = 4186 J kg-1 K-1, latent heat of fusion of ice = 3.35 × 105 J kg-1 and latent heat of steam = 2.256 × 106 J kg-1.
Answer:
We have
Mass of the ice, m = 3 kg
Specific heat capacity of ice, sice
= 2100 J kg-1 K-1
Specific heat capacity of water, swater
= 4186 J kg-1 K-1
Latent heat of fusion ice, Lf ice
= 3.35 × 105 J kg-1
Latent heat of steam, Lsteam
= 2.256 × 106 J kg-1
Now,
Q = Heat required to convert 3 kg of ice at -12°C to steam at 100°C.
Q1 = Heat required to convert ice at – 12°C to ice at 0°C. .
msice ∆T1 = (3 kg) (2100 J kg-1 K-1) [0 – (-12)]°C = 75600 J
Q2 = Heat required to melt ice at – 0°C to water at 0°C.
mLf ice = (3 kg) (3.35 × 105 J kg-1) = 1005000 J
Q3 = Heat required to convert water at 0°C to water at 100°C.
msW ∆T2 = (3 kg) (4186 J kg-1 K-1) (100°C)
= 1255800 J
Q4 = Heat required to convert water at 100°C to steam at 100°C.
mLsteam = (3 kg) (2-256 × 106 J kg-1)
= 6768000 J
So,
Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3 + Q4
= 75600 J + 1005000 J + 1255800 J + 6768000 J
= 9.1 × 106 J

Question 6.
What is the temperature of the steel- copper junction in the steady state of the system shown in fig. Length of the steel rod = 15.0 cm, length of the copper rod = 10.0 cm, temperature of the furnace = 300°C, temperature of the other end = 0°C. The area of cross section of the steel rod is twice that of the copper rod. (Thermal conductivity of steel = 50.2 J s-1m-1K-1 and of copper = 385 J s-1m-1K-1].
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 13
Answer:
Let T be the temperature of the steel-copper junction in the steady state. Then,
\(\frac{K_1 A_1(300-T)}{L_2}=\frac{K_2 A_2(T-0)}{L_2}\)
Where 1 and 2 refer to the steel and copper rod respectively. For A1 = 2, A2, L1 = 15.0 cm, L2 = 10.0 cm, K1 = 50.2 J s-1m-1K-1,
K2 = 385 J s-1m-1K-1, we have
\(\frac{50.2 \times 2(300-\mathrm{T})}{15}=\frac{385 \mathrm{~T}}{10}\)
which gives T = 44.4°C

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 7.
An iron bar (L1 = 0.1 m, A1 = 0.02 m2, K1 = 79 W m-1 K-1) and a brass bar (L2 = 0.1 m, A2 = 0.02 m2, K2 = 109 W m-1K-1) are soldered end to end as shown in fig. The free ends of the iron bar and brass bar are maintained at 373 K and 273 K respectively. Obtain expressions for and hence compute (i) the temperature of the junction of the two bars, (ii) the equivalent thermal conductivity of the compound bar and (iii) the heat current through the compound bar.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 14
Answer:
Given,
L1 = L2 = L = 0.1 m, A1 = A2 = A = 0.02 m2, K1 = 79 W m-1 K-1, K2 = 109 W m-1K-1, T1 = 373 K and T2 = 273 K.
Under steady state condition, the heat current (H1) through iron bar is equal to the heat current (H2) through brass bar.
So, H = H1 = H2
= \(\frac{K_1 A_1\left(T_1-T_0\right)}{L_1}=\frac{K_2 A_2\left(T_0-T_2\right)}{L_2}\)
For A1 = A2 = A and L1 = L2 = L this equation leads to
K1(T1 – T0) = K2(T0 – T2)
Thus the junction temperature T0 of the two bars is T0 = \(\frac{\left(K_1 T_1+K_2 T_2\right)}{\left(K_1+K_2\right)}\) ………….. (a)
Using this equation, the heat current H through either bar is
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 15
Using these equations, the heat current H’ through the compound bar of length L1 + L2 = 2L and the equivalent thermal conductivity K, of the compound bar are given by
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 16
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 17

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter

Question 8.
A pan filled with hot food cools from 94°C to 86°C in 2 minutes when the room temperature is at 20°C. How long will it take to cool from 71°C to 69°C ?
Answer:
The average temperature of 94°C and 86°C is 90°C, which is 70°C above the room temperature. Under these conditions the pan cools 8°C in 2 minutes.
Using \(\frac{\mathrm{dT}_2}{\mathrm{~T}_2-\mathrm{T}_1}=-\frac{\mathrm{k}}{\mathrm{ms}}\) dt = – K dt we have
The average of 69°C and 71°C is 70°C, which is 50°C above room temperature. K is the same for this situation as for the original.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 12 Thermal Properties of Matter 18
The average of 69°C and 71°C is 70°C, which is 50°C above room temperature. K is the same for this situation as for the original.
\(\frac{2^{\circ} \mathrm{C}}{\text { Time }}\) = K(50°C)
When we divide above two equations, we have
\(\frac{8^{\circ} \mathrm{C} / 2 \min }{2^{\circ} \mathrm{C} / \text { time }}=\frac{K\left(70^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\right)}{\mathrm{K}\left(50^{\circ} \mathrm{C}\right)}\)
Time = 0.7 min = 42 s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Andhra Pradesh BIEAP AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 11th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Fluids Textbook Questions and Answers.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material 11th Lesson Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Very Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
Define average pressure. Mention its unit and dimensional formula. Is it a scalar or a vector? [A.P. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Average pressure (Pav) : Average power is defined as the normal force acting per unit area.
Pav = \(\frac{F}{A}\)
units → N/m2 (or) pascal
Dimensional formula → [ML-1 T-2]
Pressure is a scalar quantity.

Question 2.
Define Viscosity. What is it’s units and dimensions?
Answer:
Viscosity: The property of a liquid that opposes the relative motion between its layers is called viscosity. .
G.G.S unit poise
S.I unit → Nm-2s
Dimensional formula = [M1L-1T-1]

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 3.
What is the principle behind the carburetor of an automobile ? [AP – Mar. 15; TS – Mar. ’18, ’17]
Answer:
The carburetor of automobile has a venturi channel (nozzle) through which air flows with a large speed. The pressure is then lowered at the narrow neck and the petrol is sucked up in the chamber to provide the correct mixture of air to fuel necessary for combustion. ”

Question 4.
What is magnus effect ? [T.S. Mar. 16; A.P. Mar. 15]
Answer:
The difference in the velocities of air results in the pressure difference between the lower and upper faces and there is a net upward force on the ball. This dynamic lift due to spinning is called magnus effect.

Question 5.
Why are drops and bubbles spherical ? [A.P. Mar. 18, 17, 16, 14]
Answer:
The surface tension of a liquid tends to have minimum surface area. For a given volume, the surface area is minimum for a sphere. Hence rain drops are spherical shape.

Question 6.
Give the expression for the excess pressure in a liquid drop. [T.S. Mar. 17]
Answer:
Excess pressure in a liquid drop, pi – p0 = \(\frac{2 s}{r}\)
where s = Surface tension; r = Radius of the liquid drop.

Question 7.
Give the expression for the excess pressure in an air bubble inside the liquid.
Answer:
Excess pressure in an air bubble inside the liquid, pi – p0 = \(\frac{2 s}{r}\)
where s = Surface tension
r = Radius of the air bubble.
Air bubble forms inside the liquid, hence it has one liquid surface.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 8.
Give the expression for the excess pressure soap bubble in air. [T.S. Mar. 16]
Answer:
Soap bubble have two interfaces, hence excess pressure inside a soap bubble is pi – p0 = \(\frac{4 s}{r}\)
where s = Surface tension
r = Radius of the soap bubble.

Question 9.
What are water proofing agents and water wetting agents ? What do they do ?
Answer:
Water proofing agents are added, to create a large angle of contact between water and fibres.
Soaps, detergents and dying substances are wetting agents. When they are added, the angle of contact becomes small. So that they may penetrate well and become effective.

Question 10.
What is angle of contact ? [A.P. Mar. 16]
Answer:
The angle between tangent to the liquid surface at the point of contact and solid surface inside the liquid is termed as angle of contact (0).

Question 11.
Mention any two examples that obey Bernoullis theorem and justify them. [A.P. Mar. 18]
Answer:

  1. In heavy winds house roof’s are blown off. When the velocity of the wind is greater on the roof top than inside the house, then the pressure on the roof top becomes less than that inside the house. This pressure difference causes the dynamic lift.
  2. When a fan is rotating, papers are blown off from .the table top. The velocity of wind on the paper increases due to fan and hence pressure decreases. Due to this pressure difference papers are blown off.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
When water flows through a pipe, which of the layers moves fastest and slowest ?
Answer:
Water flows through a pipe, the layers near the axis of the tube are fastest and at the walls of the tube are slowest
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 1

Question 13.
“Terminal velocity is more if surface area of the body is more”. Give reasons in support of your answer.
Answer:
Surface area (A) = 4πr2 and terminal velocity (υt) αr2
As surface area increases, r2 is also increases. Then terminal velocity is also increases.
∴ Terminal velocity is more, if surface area of the body is more.

Short Answer Questions

Question 1.
What is atmospheric pressure and how is it determined using Barometer ?
Answer:
Atmospheric pressure : Atmospheric pressure at any point is equal to the weight of a column of air of unit cross sectional area extending from that point to the top of the earth’s atmosphere.
1 atm = 1.013 × 105 pa
Determination of atmospheric pressure using barometer: A long glass tube closed at one end and filled with mercury is inverted into a trough of mercury. This device is known as mercury barometer.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 2
The space above the mercury column in the tube contains only mercury vapour whose pressure Pis so small, that it may be neglected. The pressure inside the column at point A must equal the pressure at B.
∴ Pressure at B = Atmospheric pressure = Pa
Pa = ρgh = Pressure at A …………………… (1)
Where ρ is density of mercury and h is the height of the mercury column in the tube. In the experiment it is found that the mercury column in the barometer has a height of about 76cm at the sea level equivalent to one atmosphere.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
What is guage pressure and how is a manometer used for measuring pressure differences ?
Answer:
Guage pressure : The guage pressure is the difference of the actual pressure and the atmospheric pressure. Pg = P – Pa
measurement of pressure differences :

  1. The manometer consists of a U-shaped tube, which is filled with a low density liquid (oil) for measuring small pressure difference and high density liquid
    (mercury) for measuring large pressure difference.
  2. One end of the tube is connected to the vessel D whose pressure of air measure and the other end of the tube is open.
  3. If pressure of air in vessel D is more than the earth’s atmosphere, the level of liquid in arm I will go down up to point A and level of liquid in arm II rises up to C.
  4. Then the pressure of air in vessel is equal to pressure at point A.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 3
  5. Note the difference of liquid levels in the two arms of U-tube.(Say h). p be density of the liquid. Pa is the atmospheric pressure.
  6. Pressure at point A (PA) = Pressure at point B = Pressure at point C + Pressure due to column of liquid.
    PA = Pc + hρg (or) PA – Pc = hρg
    Here Pc = Pa, PA = P, ∴ P – Pa = hρg
    P – Pa = Pg = guage pressure = hρg

Question 3.
State Pascal’s law and verify it with the help of an experiment.
Answer:
Pascal’s law : It states that if gravity effect is neglected, the pressure at every point of liquid in equilibrium of rest is same.
Proof :

  1. Imagine a circular cylinder of uniform cross-sectional area A, such that points C and D lie on flat faces of the cylinder.
  2. The liquid inside the cylinder is in equilibrium under the action of forces exerted by the liquid outside the cylinder.
  3. These forces are acting every where perpendicular to the surface of the cylinder.
  4. Thus the forces on the flat faces of the cylinder at C and D will be perpendicular to the forces on the curved surface of the cylinder.
  5. Since liquid is in equilibrium, the sum of the forces acting on the curved surface of the cylinder must be zero.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 4
  6. If P1 and P2 are the pressures at points C and D respectively. F1 and F2 are the forces acting on the flat surfaces of the cylinder due to liquid, then
    F1 = P1 A and F2 = P2A Since liquid is in equilibrium, therefore
    F1 = F2
    P1 A = P2A
    (or) P1 = P2
    It means the pressures at C and D are the same. This proves the pascal’s law.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
Explain hydraulic lift and hydraulic brakes.
Answer:
Hydraulic lift and hydraulic brakes are based on the Pascal’s law.

Hydraulic lift : Here C and D are two cylinders of different areas of cross section. They are connected to each other with a pipe E. Each cylinder is provided with airtight frictionless piston. Let a, A be the area’s of cross-sections of the piston at C and D (a < < A)
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 5
The cylinders are filled with an incompressible liquid.
Let f be the applied force at C. Pressure exerted on the liquid
P = \(\frac{f}{a}\) ……………. (1)
According to pascal’s law, this pressure is transmitted to piston of cylinder D. Upward force at D will be
F = PA = \(\frac{f}{a}\) A = f \(\frac{A}{a}\) …………… (2)
As A > > a
∴ F > > f .
∴ Heavy load placed on the larger piston is easily lifted.

Hydraulic Brakes :
When the brake pedal is pressed, the piston (P) of the master cylinder is pushed inwards. There will be increased pressure on liquid at P, which is transmitted equally to P1 and P2 of wheel cylinder in accordance with pascal’s law. Due to which P1 and P2 move outwards. Breakshoes to move away from each other which in turn press against the inner rim of the wheel. The brake becomes operative.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 6

Question 5.
What is hydrostatic paradox ?
Answer:
Consider three vessels A, B and C of different shapes. They are connected at the bottom by a horizontal pipe. On filling with the level in the three vessels is the same, though they hold different amounts of water. This is so because water at the bottom has the same pressure below each section of the vessel. It means the liquid pressure at a point is independent of the quantity of liquid but depends upon the depth of point below the liquid surface. This is known as hydrostatic paradox.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 7

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 6.
Explain how pressure varies with depth.
Answer:
Consider a fluid at rest in a container. In figure point 1 is at a height h above a point 2. The pressure at points 1 and 2 are P1 and P2. As the fluid is at rest, the horizontal forces should be zero. The resultant vertical forces should balance the weight of the element. Pressure at top (P1A) acting downward, pressure at bottom (P2A) acting upward.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 8
(P2 – P1) A = mg ………………… (1)
Mass of the fluid (m) = ρv = ρhA
(P2 – P1) = ρgh ………………. (2)
Pressure difference depends on the vertical distance h.
If the point 1 under discussion is shifted to the top of the fluid (water), which is open to the atmosphere, P1 may be replaced by atmospheric pressure (Pa) and P2 by P. Then eq (2) gives
P – Pa = ρgh
P = Pa + ρgh ……………… (3)
Thus the pressure P, at depth below the surface of a liquid open to the atmosphere is greater than atmospheric pressure by an amount ρgh.

Question 7.
What is Torricelli’s law ? Explain how the speed of efflux is determined with an experiment.
Answer:
Torricelli’s theorem : The velocity of efflux i.e., the velocity with which the liquid flows out of an orifice (i.e., a narrow hole) is equal to that which is freely falling body would acquire in falling through a vertical distance equal to the depth of orifice below the free surface of liquid.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 9
Consider ideal liquid of density p contained in a tank provided with a narrow hole.
Let h = Height of free surface of liquid above O.
P = Atmospheric pressure
v = Velocity of efflux
Applying Bernoulli’s theorem at A and O
(P + ρgh + O)atA = [P + 0 + \(\frac{1}{2}\)ρv2]atO
P + ρgh = P + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρv2 = ρgh = \(\frac{1}{2}\)ρv2
v = \(\sqrt{2 g h}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 8.
What is Venturi-meter? Explain how it is used.
Answer:
Venturi meter: The Venturi-meter is a device to measure the flow speed of incompressible fluid.

  1. It consists of a tube with a broad diameter and a small constriction at the middle.
  2. A manometer in the form of a U-tube is also attached to it, with one of arm at the broad neck point of the tube and the other at constriction as shown in figure.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 10
  3. The manometer contains a liquid of density ρm.
  4. The pressure difference causes the fluid in the U-tube connected at the narrow neck to rise in comparison to the other arm.
  5. Filter pumps, sprayers used for perfumes, carburetor of automobile has used on this principle.

Question 9.
What is Reynolds number ? What is it’s significance ?
Answer:
Reynolds number : “Reynold number is a pure number which determines the nature of flow of liquid through a pipe”.
Reynold number (Re) = \(\frac{\rho \mathrm{vd}}{\eta}\)
Where ρ is density of the fluid
v is speed of the fluid
d is diameter of the pipe

  1. If the flow is stream line (or) laminor Re < 1000
  2. If the flow is turbulent, Re > 2000
  3. If the flow becomes unsteady, 1000 < Re < 2000

Physical significance of Reynolds number : Reynold’s number describes the ratio of the inertial force per unit area to the viscous force per unit area for a flowing fluid.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 11

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 10.
Explain dynamic lift with examples.
Answer:
Dynamic lift: Dynamic lift is the force that act on a body, by virtue of its motion through a fluid.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 12
e.g.1 : Fig (a) shows, ball moving without spin. Stream lines are equally distributed above and below the ball. The velocity above and below the ball is same resulting zero pressure difference. There no upward (or) downward force on the ball.

Fig (b) shows, ball moving with spin stream lines are more crowded above the ball than below. The velocity of air above the ball is large (v + vr) and below it is smaller (v – vr). As a result, there is a pressure difference between lower and upper faces. Pressure is less at top of the ball and pressure is morebelow the ball. There is a net upward force on the ball.
e.g. 2 : Dynamic lift also acts on the an aeroplane wing.

Question 11.
Explain Surface Tension and Surface energy. [Mar. 13]
Answer:
Surface tension (S): The force acting per unit length of an imaginary line drawn on the surface of a liquid, normal to it and parallel to the surface is called surface tension.
T = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{l}\)
S.l unit → N/m
D.F → [MT-2]
Surface energy (E): The additional potential energy due to molecular forces per unit surface area is called surface tension.
Surface energy = \(\)
S.l Unit → J/m2
D.F → (MT-2 )
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 13
Consider a horizontal liquid film ending in bar free to slide over parallel guides. We move the bar by a small distance d. The area of the surface increases, the system now has more energy, this means – that some work has to be done against an internal force F.
Work done (W) = F.d
If the surface energy of the film is S per unit area, the extra area is 2dl. A film has two sides and the liquid in between them.
So there are two surfaces and the extra energy is
S (2dl) = Fd
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{F}}{2 l}\)
Surface tension is equal to the surface energy and is also equal to the force per unit length exerted by the fluid on the movable bar.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
Explain how surface tension can be measured experimentally.
Answer:
A flat vertical glass plate, below which a vessel of some liquid is kept, forms one arm of the balance. The plate is balanced by weights on the otherside, with its horizontal edge just over water. The vessel is raised slightly till the liquid just touches the glass plate and pulls it down a little because of surface tension. Weights are added till the plate just clears water. Suppose the additional weight requires is W.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 14
Surface tension of liquid air interface is
Sla = \(\frac{\mathrm{W}}{2 l}=\frac{\mathrm{mg}}{2 l}\)
Where l is length of the plate edge, m is extra mass.

Long Answer Questions

Question 1.
State Bernoulli’s principle. From conservation of energy in a fluid flow through a tube, arrive at Bernoulli’s equation. Give an application of Bernoulli’s theorem.
Answer:
Bernoulli’s principle : Bernoulli principle states that in a stream line flow, the sum of the pressure, the K.E per unit volume and the P.E per unit volume remains a constant.
P + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρv2 + ρgh = constant

  1. Consider a non-viscous, incompressible fluid is flowing through the pipe in a steady flow.
  2. Consider the flow at two regions BC and DE. Initially the fluid lying between B and D.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 15
  3. During short time interval At, this fluid would have moved. Suppose V1 is the speed at B and V2 is the speed at D.
  4. In time ∆t, distance moved from B to C is V1 ∆t in the same interval (∆t) distance moved from D to E is V2∆t.
  5. Let P1 and P2 be pressure act at area’s of cross¬sections A1 and A2 of the two regions.
  6. The work done on the fluid at left end (BC)
    = Force × displacement
    = Pressure × Area × displacement
    = P1A1 × V1∆t (∆V = A1V1∆t) = P1∆V ………………. (1)
  7. Similarly work done by the fluid at right end (DE)
    = P2A2 × V2∆t = P2∆V …………………. (2)
  8. Work done on the fluid is taken as positive and workdone by the fluid is taken as negative.
    ∴ Total work done (W) = (P1 – P1) ∆V ………………. (3)
    Part of this work goes into changing the K.E of the fluid and part goes into changing gravitational P.E.
  9. Mass of the fluid(∆m) passing through the pipe in time (∆t) is ∆m = ρA1V1∆t
    where ρ is the density of the fluid.
    ∆m = ρ∆V ………………….. (4)
  10. Gravitational P.E = ρg∆V (h2 – h1) ………………… (5)
    Change in K.E (∆K) = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ∆V (V22 – V12) …………….. (6)
  11. According to law of conservation of energy
    (P1 – P2) ∆V = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ ∆V (V22 – V12) + ρg∆V (h2 – h1)
    P1 – P2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ (V22 – V12) + ρg (h2 – h1)
    P1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ V12 + ρgh1 = P1 + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ V22 + ρgh2
    P + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρ v2 + ρgh = constant ………………. (7)

∴ Sum of the pressure, K.E per unit volume and P.E per unit volume remains constant. Application of Bernoulli’s theorem :

  1. It explains the dynamic lift on the wings of aeroplanes.
  2. It explains the dynamic lift experienced by a spinning cricket ball.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
Define coefficient of viscosity. Explain Stoke’s law and explain the conditions under which a rain drop attains terminal velocity, υt. Give the expression for υt.
Answer:
Coefficient of viscosity (η): The coefficient of viscosity is defined as the tangential force per unit area of the layer, required to maintain unit velocity gradient.
η = \(\frac{F}{A\left(\frac{\Delta V}{\Delta x}\right)}\)
S.l. unit → Nm-2 s (or) PaS
C.G.S unit → Poise
Dimensional formula = [ML-1T-1]
Stoke’s law : According to this law the viscous force acting on a moving body which is spherical in shape is directly proportional to

  1. Coefficient of viscosity of fluid (η)
  2. Radius of the spherical body (r)
  3. Velocity of the body (v)

∴ F ∝ ηrv
F = Kηrv
Where K is a constant of proportionality. Experimentally it was found to be 6π.
∴ F = 6πηrv
When rain drops falling through air from the clouds reach the surface with almost constant speed through they are moving under gravitational force. This velocity is called terminal velocity. After attaining the terminal velocity, net force acting on the rain drop is zero.
According to stokes law, F ∝ ηrv
F = 6πηrv (∵ 6π = K = Proportionality constant)
Let ρ, r be the density and radius of the sphere.
The fluid density be σ.
The forces acting on the sphere are

  1. Weight of the sphere W = mg
    W = Vρg = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3ρg …………….. (1)
  2. The force of buoyancy (B) = V σ g = \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3σg ……………. (2)
  3. Viscous force (f) = 6πηv ………………… (3)
    When the sphere attains terminal velocity (vt), the net force on the body becomes zero.
    AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 16
    ∴ At terminal velocity
    Net downward force = Net upward force
    W = B + f, W – B = f
    \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3ρg – \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3σg = 6πηrvt;
    ∴ \(\frac{4}{3}\)πr3g (ρ – σ) = 6πηrvt
    Vt = \(\frac{2}{9} \frac{r^2 g(\rho-\sigma)}{\eta}\) ………………. (4)

Problems

Question 1.
Calculate the work done in blowing a soap bubble of diameter 0.6 cm against the surface tension force. (Surface tension of soap solution = 2.5 × 102 Nm-1).
Solution:
D = 0.6 cm = 0.6 × 102 m
r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{0.6 \times 10^{-2}}{2}\) = 0.3 × 102 m
S = 2.5 × 102 N/m
W = 8πr2s
= 8 × 3.14 × (0.3 × 10-2)2 × 2.5 × 10-2
W = 5.652 × 10-6 J

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
How high does methyl alcohol rise in a glass tube of diameter 0.06 cm ? (Surface tension of methyl alcohol = 0.023 Nm-1 and density = 0.8 gmcm-3. Assume that the angle of contact is zero)
Solution:
D = 0.06cm, θ = 0°
r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{0.06}{2}\) = 0.03 cm = 0.03 × 10-2 m
= 3 × 10-4 m
S = 0.023 N/m, Density = 0.8 gm/c.c.
= 0.8 × \(\frac{10^{-3}}{10^{-6}}\)
ρ = 0.8 × 103 kg/m3
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{hr \rho g}}{2 \cos \theta}\)
h = \(\frac{2 \cos \theta}{r \rho g}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 0.023}{3 \times 10^{-4} \times 0.8 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\) (∵ cos 0° = 1)
= 0.0019 × 10-1 m
≈ 0.002 m
h = 2 cm .

Question 3.
What should be the radius of a capillay tube if water has to rise to a height pf 6 cm in it ? (Surface tension of water = 7.2 × 10-2 Nm-1).
Solution:
h = 6 × 10-2 m
S = 7.2 × 10-2 N/m
Density of water (ρ) = 103 kg/m3
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{hr \rho g}}{2}\)
r = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~S}}{\mathrm{h \rho g}}=\frac{2 \times 7.2 \times 10^{-3}}{6 \times 10^{-2} \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
r = \(\frac{14.4}{58.8} \) × 10-3
r = 0.24 × 10-3 m
r = 0.24 mm

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
Find the depression of the meniscus in the capillary tube of diameter 0.4 mm dipped in a beaker containing , mercury. (Density of mercury = 13.6 × 103 Kg m-3 and surface tension of mercury = 0.49 Nm-1 and angle of contact = 135°).
Solution:
D = 4 m.m
r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{4}{2}\) = 2m.m = 2 × 10-3 m
ρ = 13.6 × 103 kg/m3
θ = 135°, S = 0.49 Nm
cosθ = cos 135°
= – sin 45° = – \(\frac{1}{\sqrt{2}}\)
S = \(\frac{\mathrm{hr \rho g}}{2 \cos \theta}\)
h = \(\frac{2 \mathrm{~s} \cos \theta}{\mathrm{r \rho g}}\)
= 2 × 0.49 \(\left(\frac{-1}{\sqrt{2}}\right) \frac{1}{2 \times 10^{-3} \times 13.6 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
h = \(\frac{-0.49}{13.6 \times 9.8 \times \sqrt{2}}\)
h = -0.024m.

Question 5.
If the diameter of a soap bubble is 10 mm and its surface tension is 0.04 Nm-1, find the excess pressure inside the bubble. [Mar. 14]
Solution:
D = 10 m.m
r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{10}{2}\) = 5 m.m
= 5 × 10-3
S = 0.04 N/m
Pi – P0 = \(\frac{4 S}{r}=\frac{4 \times 0.04}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 0.032 × 103
Pi – P0 = 32 N/m2 (or) Pascal.

Question 6.
If work done by an agent to form a bubble of radius R is W, then how much energy is required to increase its radius to 2R ?
Solution:
R1 = R, R2 = 2R
Initial work done (W) = 8πR2S
Final work done (W) = 8π[R22 – R12]S
= 8π [4R2 – R2]S
= 3 × 8π R2S
W = 3W.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 7.
If two soap bubbles of radii R1 and R2 (in vacuum) coalasce under isothermal conditions, what is the radius of the new bubble. Take T as the surface tension of soap solution.
Solution:
R1, R2 and R be the radii of first, second and resultant bubble. The soap bubbles coalesce in vacuum, so surface energy do not change
E = E1 + E2
8π R2T = 8π R12T + 8π R22 T
R2 = R12 + R22
R = \(\sqrt{R_1^2+R_2^2}\)

Additional Problems

Question 1.
Explain why
a) The blood pressure in humans is greater at the feet than at the brain.
b) Atmospheric pressure at a height of about 6 km decreases to nearly half of its value at the sea level, though the height of the atmosphere is more than 100 km.
c) Hydrostatic pressure is a scalar quantities even though pressure is force divided by area.
Answer:
a) The height of the blood column in the human body is more at feet than at the brain. That is why, the blood exerts more pressure at the feet than at the brain (∴ pressure = hρg)

b) We know that the density of air is maximum near the surface of earth and decreases rapidly with height and at a height of about 6 km, it decreases to near by half its value at the sea level. Beyond 6 km height the density of air decreases very slowly with height. Due to this reason, the atmospheric pressure at a height of about 6 km decreases to nearby half of its value at sea level.

c) Since due to applied force on liquid, the pressure is transmitted equally in all directions inside the liquid. That is why there is no fixed direction for the pressure due to liquid. Hence hydrostatic pressure is a scalar quantity.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
Explain why
a) The angle of contact of mercurywith glass is obtuse, while that of water with glass is acute.
b) Water on a clean glass surface tends to spread out while mercury on the same surface tends to form drops. (Put differently, water wets glass while mercury does not.) [T.S. Mar. 15]
c) Surface tension of a liquid is independent of the area of the surface.
d) Water with detergent disolved in it should have small angles of contact.
e) A drop of liquid under no external forces is always spherical in shape.
Answer:
a) When a small quantity of liquid is poured on solid, three interfaces, namely liquid- air, solid-air and solid-liquid are formed. The surface tensions corresponding to these three interfaces are SLA, SSA and SSL respectively. Let 0 be the angle of contact between the liquid and solid. The molecules in the region, where the three interfaces meet are in equilibrium. It means net force acting on them is zero. For the molecule at 0 to be in equilibrium, we have.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 17
In case of mercury glass, SSA < SSL, therefore cosθ is negative or θ > 90° i.e. obtuse. In case of water-glass, SSA > SSL, therefore cosθ is positive or θ < 90° i,e. acute.

b) For mercury glass, angle of contact is obtuse. In order to achieve this obtuse value of angle of contact, the mercury tends to form a drop. In case of water glass, the angle of contact is acute. To achieve this acute value of angle of contact, the water tends to spread.

c) Surface tension of liquid is the force acting per unit length on a line drawn tangentially to the liquid surface at rest. Since this force is independent of the area of liquid surface, therefore surface tension is also independent of the area of the liquid surface.

d) We know that the cloth has narrow spaces in the form of capillaries. The rise of liquid in a capillary tude is directly proportional to cos0. if 0 is small cos0 will be large. Due to which capillary rise will be more and so the detergent will penetrate more in cloth.

e) In the absence of external forces, the surface of the liquid drop tends to acquire the minimum surface area due to surface tension. Since for a given volume, the surface area of sphere is least, hence the liquid drop takes the spherical shape.

Question 3.
Fill in the blanks using the word (S) from the list appended with each statement ;
a) Surface tension of liquids generally … with temperatures (increases / decreases)
b) Viscosity of gases… with temperature, whereas viscosity of liquids … with temperature (increases / decreases)
c) For solids with elastic modulus of rigidity, the shearing force is proportional to…. while for fluids it is proportional to … (shear strain / rate of shear strain)
d) For a fluid in a steady flow, the increase in flow speed at a constriction follows (conservation of mass / Bernoulli’s principle)
e) For the model of a plane in a wind tunnel, turbulence occurs at a… speed for turbulence for an actual plane (greater / smaller)
Answer:
a) Decreases
b) increases; decreases
c) Shear strain; rate of shear strain.
d) Conservation of mass; Bernoullis principle.
e) Greater.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
Explain why
a) To keep a piece of paper horizontal, you should blow over, not under, it.
b) When we try to close a water tap with our fingers, fast jets of water gush through the openings between our fingers.
c) The size of the needle of a syringe controls flow rate better than the thumb pressure exerted by a doctor while administering an injection.
d) A fluid flowing out of a small hole in a vessel results in a backward thrust on the vessel.
e) A spinning cricket ball in air does not follow a parabolic trajectory.
Answer:
a) When we blow over the paper, the velocity of air blow increases and hence pressure of air on it decreases (according to Bernoullis theorem), whereas pressure of air below the paper is atmosphere. Hence the paper stays horizontal.

b) By doing so the area of the outlet of water jet is reduced, so velocity of water increases according to equation of continuity av = a constant.

c) When a fluid is flowing out of a small hole in a vessel it acquires a large velocity and hence possesses large momentum. Since no external force is acting on the system, a backward velocity must be attained by the vessel (according to law of conservation of momentum). As a result of it, impulse (backward thrust) is experienced by the vessel.

d) There, size of the needle controls velocity of flow and thumb pressure controls pressure. According to Bernoulli’s theorem, P + ρgh + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρV2 = a constant shows that P occurs with power one and V occurs with power two, hence the velocity has more influence. That is why the needle has a better control over flow.

e) If the ball is spinning well as moving linearly, the streamlines at the top of ball due to two types of motion are opposed to each other and those below are in the same direction. As a result of it, the velocity of air flow is greater below than above the ball. Now, according to Bernoullis principle, the pressure on the upper side of the ball becomes more than the pressure on the lower side of ball. Due to it, a resultant force F acts upon the ball at right angle to linear motion in the downward, direction, resulting the ball to move along a curved path.

Question 5.
A 50 kg girl wearing high heel shoes balances on a single heel. The heel is circular with a diameter 1.0 cm. What is the pressure exerted by the heel on the horizontal floor ?
Answer:
Here, m = 50kg; r =D/2 = 1/2 cm = \(\frac{1}{200}\) m
Pressure = \(\frac{\text { Force }}{\text { area }}=\frac{m g}{\pi r^2}=\frac{50 \times 9.8}{(22 / 7)(1 / 200)^2}\)
= 6.24 × 106 Nm-2.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 6.
Toricelli’s barometer used mercury. Pascal duplicated it using French wine of density 984 kg m-3. Determine the height of the wine column for normal atmosphere pressure.
Answer:
P = 0.76 × (13.6 × 103) × 9.8
= h × 984 × 9.8 or
h = \(\frac{0.76 \times 13.6 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}{984 \times 9.8}\)
= 10.5 m.

Question 7.
A vertical off-shore structure is built to withstand a maximum stress of 109 Pa. Is the structure suitable for putting up on top of an oil well in the ocean ? Take the depth of the ocean to be roughly 3 km and ignore ocean currents.
Answer:
Here, maximum stress = 109Pa,
h = 3km = 3 × 103m;
ρ(water) = 103kg/m3 and g = 9.8 m/s2
The structure will be suitable for putting upon top of an oil well provided the pressure exerted by sea water is less than the maximum stress it can bear.
Pressure due to sea water, P = hρg
= 3 × 103 × 103 × 9.8
= 2.94 × 107 Pa
Since the pressure of sea water is less than the maximum stress of 109 Pa, the structure will be suitable for putting upon top of the oil well.

Question 8.
A hydraulic automobile lift is designed to lift cars with a maximum mass of 3000 kg. The area of cross-section of the piston carrying the load is 425 cm2. What maximum pressure would the smaller piston have to bear ?
Answer:
The maximum force, which the bigger piston can bear,
F = 3000 kgf = 3000 × 9.8 N
∴ Area of piston, A = 425 cm2
= 425 × 10-4 m2
∴ maximum pressure on the bigger piston.
P = \(\frac{F}{A}=\frac{3000 \times 9.8}{425 \times 10^{-4}}\) = 6.92 × 105 Pa
Since the liquid transmits pressure equally, therefore the maximum pressure the smaller piston can bear is 6.92 × 105 Pa.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 9.
A U-tube contains water and methylated spirit separated by mercury. The mercury columns in the two arms are in level with 10.0 cm of water in one arm and 12.5 cm of spirit in the other. What is the specific gravity of spirit ?
Answer:
For water column in one arm of U-tube,
h1 = 10.0 cm; ρ1 (density) = 1g cm-3
For spirit column in other arm of U-tube, h2 = 12.5 cm; ρ1 = ?
As the mercury column in the two arms of U-tube are in level, therefore pressure exerted by each is equal. Hence h1ρ1g = h2ρ2g or
P2 = \(\frac{h_1 \rho_1}{h_2}=\frac{10 \times 1}{12.5}\) = 0.8 g cm-3
Therefore, relative density of spirit = ρ21
= \(\frac{0.8}{1}\) = 0.8

Question 10.
In the previous problem, if 15.0 cm of water and spirit each are further poured into the respective arms of the tube, what is the difference in the levels of mercury in the two arms ? (Specific, gravity of mercury = 13.6)
Answer:
On pouring 15.0 cm of water and spirit each into the respective arms of U-tube, the mercury level will rise in the arm containing spirit. Let h be the difference in the levels of mercury in two arms of U-tube and p be the density of mercury.
∴ The pressure exerted by h cm of mercury column = difference in pressure exerted by water and spirit.
∴ h1ρ1g = h2ρ2g ……………. (1)
Here h = ? ρ =13.6 g cm-3
ρ1 =1 cm-3
ρ2 = 0.8 g cm-3
h1 = 15 + 10 = 25 cm
h2 = 15 + 12.5 = 27.5 cm
Putting values in (i) we get h × 13.6 × g
= 25 × 1 × g – 27.5 × 0.8 × g = 3g
or h = 3/13.6 = 0.22cm

Question 11.
Can Bernoulli’s equation be used to describe the flow of water through a rapid in a river ? Explain.
Answer:
No, Bernoulli’s theorem is used only for stream – line flow.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
Does it matter if one uses gauge instead of absolute pressures in applying Bernoulli’s equation ? Explain.
Answer:
No, it does not matter if one uses gauge instead of absolute pressures in applying Bernoulli’s’ equation, provided the atmospheric pressure at the two points where Bernoulli’s equation is applied are significantly different.

Question 13.
Glycerine flows steadily through a horizontal tube of length 1.5 m and radius 1.0 cm. If the amount of glycerine collected per second at one end is 4.0 × 10-3 kg s-1, what is the pressure difference between the two ends of the tube ? (Density of glycerine = 1.3 × 103 kg m-3 and viscosity of glycerine = 0.83 Pa s). [You may also like to check if the assumption of laminar flow in the tube is correct].
Answer:
Here, l = 1.5 m, r = 1.0 cm = 10-2 m, ρ = 1; 1.3 × 10-3 kg/m3; η = 0.83 Nsm-2.
Mass of glycerine flouring per sec, M = 4 × 10-3 kg/s
Volume of glycerine flouring per sec, V = \(\frac{M}{\rho}\)
V = \(\frac{4 \times 10^{-3}}{1.3 \times 10^3} \mathrm{~m}^3 \mathrm{~s}^{-1}\) m3s-1
If ρ is the difference of pressure between two ends of the tube,then using poisevilles formula we have
V = \(\frac{\pi \rho r^4}{8 \eta l}\) or P = \(\frac{V \times 8 \eta l}{\pi r^4}\)
P = \(\left(\frac{4 \times 10^{-3}}{1.3 \times 10^3}\right) \times \frac{8 \times 0.83 \times 1.5}{3.142 \times\left(10^{-2}\right)^4}\)
= 975.37 Pa

Question 14.
In a test experiment on a model aeroplane in a wind tunnel, the flow speeds on the upper and lower surfaces of the wing are 70 m s-1 and 63 m s-1 respectively. What is the lift on the wing if its area is 2.5 m2 ? Take the density of air to be 1.3 kg m-3.
Answer:
Let V1, V2 be the speeds on the upper and lower surfaces of the wing of aeroplane and P1 and P2 be the pressures on upper and lower surfaces of the wing respectively.
Then V1 = 70ms-1; V2 = 63ms-1,
P = 1.3kg m-3.
This difference of pressure provides the lift to the aeroplane.
\(\frac{P_1}{\rho}\) + gh + \(\frac{1}{2} V_1^2\) = \(\frac{P_2}{\rho}\) + gh + \(\frac{1}{2} V_2^2\)
∴ \(\frac{P_1}{\rho}-\frac{P_2}{\rho}=\frac{1}{2}\left(V_2^2-V_1^2\right)\)
or P1 – P2 = \(\frac{1}{2} \rho\left(V_2^2-V_1^2\right)\)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 1.3 [(70)2 – (63)2]
= 605.15 Pa
This difference of pressure provides the lift to the aeroplane.
So, lift on the aeroplane = Pressure difference × area of wings
= 605.15 × 2.5
= 1512.875 N
= 1.51 × 103N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 15.
Figures (a) and (b) refer to the steady flow of a (non-viscous) liquid. Which of the two figures is incorrect ? Why ?
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 18
Answer:
Figure a is incorrect. According to equation of continuity i.e. av = a constant, where area of cross – section of tube is less, the velocity of liquid flow is more than the other portion of tube. According to Bernoulli’s theorem,
P + \(\frac{1}{2}\) ρv2 = a constant i.e. where V is more P is less and avice versa.

Question 16.
The cylindrical tube of a spray pump has a cross-section of 8.0 cm2 one end of which has 40 fine holes each of diameter 1.0 mm. If the liquid flow inside the tube is 1.5 m min-1, what is the speed of ejection of the liquid through the holes ?
Answer:
Area of cross – section of tube, a1 = 8.0 cm2 = 8 × 10-4 m2
No. of holes = 40, Diameter of each hole, D = 1 mm = 10-3 m
∴ Radius of hole, r = \(\frac{D}{2}=\frac{1}{2}\) × 10-3 m
= 5 × 10-4 m
Area of cross – section of each hole = πr2
= π(5 × 10-4)2m2
Total area of cross – section of 40 holes,
a2 = 40 × π (5 × 10-4)2m2
Speed of liquid inside the tube,
V1 = 1.5m/min
= \(\frac{1.5}{60}\) ms-1
If V2 is the velocity of ejection of the liquid through the holes, then
a1V1 = a2V2 or V2 = \(\frac{a_1 V_1}{a_2}\)
V2 = \(\frac{\left(8 \times 10^{-4}\right) \times 1.5}{60 \times 40 \times \pi \times\left(5 \times 10^4\right)^2}\)
= 0.637 ms-1

Question 17.
A U-shaped wire is dipped in a soap solution and removed. The thin shaped film formed between the surfaces and the light slider supports a weight of 1.5 × 10-2 N (which includes the small weight of the slider). The length of the slider is 30 cm. What is the surface tension of the film ?
Answer:
We know that soap film has two free surfaces, so total length of the film to be supported,
= 2l = 2 × 30 = 60 cm
= 0.6 m
Total force on the slider due to surface tension will be,
F = S × 2l
= S × 0.6 N
In equilibrium position, the force F on slider due to surface tension must balance the weight mg
(1.5 × 10-2)N i.e. F = 1.5 × 10-2
= S × 0.6 Or
S = \(\frac{1.5 \times 10^{-2}}{0.6}\)
2.5 × 10-2Nm-1

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 18.
Figure (a) shows a thin liquid film supporting a small weight = 4.5 × 10-2 N. What is the weight supported by a film of the same liquid at the same temperature in Fig. (b) and (c) ? Explain your answer physically.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 19
Answer:
a) Here, length of film supporting the weight
= 40cm = 0.4 m
Total liquid film supported (or force)
= 4.5 × 10-2 N
film has two free surfaces, ∴ surface tension,
S = \(\frac{4.5 \times 10^{-2}}{2 \times 0.4}\)
S = 5.625 × 10-2 Nm-1
Since the liquid is same for all the cases (a), (b), (c) and temperature is also same, therefore surface tension for cases (b) and (c) will also be the same = 5.625 × 10-2. In figure (b) and (c) the length of the film supporting the weight is also the same as that of(a), hence the total weight supported in each case is 4.5 × 10-2 N.

Question 19.
What is the pressure inside the drop of mercury of radius 3.00 mm at room temperature ? Surface tension of mercury at that temperature (20°C) is 4.65 × 10-1 Nm-1. The atmospheric pressure is 1.01 × 105 Pa. Also give the excess pressure inside the drop.
Answer:
Here, r = 3.0 mm = 3 × 10-3 m;
S = 4.65 × 10-1 Nm-1;
P = 1.01 × 105 Pa
Excess of pressure inside the drop of mercury is given by
P = \(\frac{2 S}{r}=\frac{2 \times 4.65 \times 10^{-1}}{3 \times 10^{-3}}\)
= 310 Pa
Total pressure inside the drop = P + ρ
= 1.01 × 105 + 310
= 1.01 31 × 105 Pa

Question 20.
What is the excess pressure inside a bubble of soap solution of radius 5.0 mm, given that the surface tension of soap solution at the temperature (20°C) is 2.50 × 10-2 Nm-1? If an air bubble of the same dimension were formed at depth of 40.0 cm inside a container containing the soap solution (of relative density 1.20), what would be the pressure inside the bubble ? (1 atmospheric pressure is 1.01 × 105 Pa).
Answer:
Here, S = 2.5 × 10-2 Nm-1, r = 5.00 mm = 5 × 10-3 m.
Density of soap solution, ρ = 1.2 × 103 kg m-3
Excess pressure inside the soap bubble,
P = \(\frac{4 s}{r}=\frac{4 \times 2.5 \times 10^{-2}}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 20 Pa
Excess pressure inside the air bubble, P’ = \(\frac{2S}{r}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 2.5 \times 10^{-2}}{5 \times 10^{-3}}\) = 10 Pa
Total pressure inside the air bubble at depth h in soap solution – ρ’ + atmospheric pressure + hρg
= 10 + 1.01 × 105 + 0.4 × 1.2 × 103 × 9.8
= 1.06 × 103 Pa

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 21.
A tank with a square base of area 1.0 m2 is divided by a vertical partition in the middle. The bottom of the partition has a small-hinged door of area 20 cm2. The tank is filled with water in one compartment and an acid (of relative density 1.7) in the other, both to a height of 4.0 m. compute the force necessary to keep the door close.
Answer:
For compartment containing water,
h1 = 4m, ρ1 = 103 kg m-3
The pressure exerted by water at the door provided at bottom
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 20
P1 = h1ρ1g
= 4 × 103 × 9.8
= 3.92 × 104 Pa
For compartment containing acid,
h2 = 4m,
ρ2 = 1.7 × 1.03 kg/m3
The pressure exerted by acid at the door provided at bottom.
P2 = h2ρ2g
= 4 × 1.7 × 103 × 9.8
= 6.664 × 104 Pa
∴ Difference of pressure = P2P1
= 6.664 × 104 – 3.92 × 104
= 2.774 × 104Pa
Given, area of door, A = 20cm2
= 20 × 10-4m2
Force on the door = difference in pressure × area
= (P2 – P1) × A
= (2.774 × 104) × (20 × 104)
= 54.88N
≈ 55N
To keep the door closed, the force equal to 55 N should be applied horizontally on the door from compartment containing water to that containing acid.

Question 22.
A manometer reads the pressure of a gas in an enclosure as shown in Fig. (a) when a pump removes some of the gas, the manometer reads as in Fig. (b) The liquid used in the manometers is mercury and the atmo-spheric pressure is 76 cm of mercury.
a) Give the absolute and gauge pressure of the gas in the enclosure for cases (a) and b) in units of cm of mercury.
b) How would the levels change in case (b) if 13.6 cm of water (immiscible with mercury, are poured into the right limb of the manometer? (Ignore the small change in the volume of the gas).
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 21
Answer:
a) Here, atomospheric presure, p = 76 cm of mercury
In Fig (a) Pressure head
h = + 20 cm
∴ Absolute pressure = p + h
= 76 + 20
= 96 cm of mercury
Gauge pressure = h = 20 cm of mercury.
In fig (b) pressure head, h = -18 cm
Absolute pressure = p + h
= 76+ (-18)
= 58 cm of mercury
Gauge pressure = h = -18cm of mercury.

b) Here 13.6 cm of water added in right limb is equiralent to
\(\frac{13.6}{13.6}\) = 1 cm of mercury column.
i.e., h1 = 1 cm of mercury column.
Now pressure at A, PA = P + h1 = 76 + 1
= 77 cm
Let the difference in mercury levels in the two lumbs be h1, then pressure at B,
PB = 58 + h1 or
As PA = PB = 77 = 58 + h1
h1 = 77 – 58 = 19 cm of mercury column.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 23.
Two vessels have the same base area but different shapes. The first vessel takes twice the volume of water that the second vessel requires to fill upto a particular comon height. Is the force exerted by the water on the base of the vessel the same in the two cases ? If so, why do the vessels filled with water to that same height give different readings on a weighing scale ?
Answer:
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 22
Since the pressure depends upon the height of water column and the height of the water column in the two vessels of different shapes is the same.hence there will be same pressure due to water on the base of each vessel. As the base area of each vessel is same, hence there will be equal force acting on the two base areas due to water pressure. The water exerts force on the walls of the vessel also. In case, the walls of the vessel are not perpendicular to base, the force exerted by water on the walls has a net non-zero vertical component which is more in first vessel than that of second vessel. That is why, the two vessel:; filled with water to same vertical height show different readings on a weighing machine.

Question 24.
During blood transfusion the needle is inserted in a vein where the gauge pressure is 2000 Pa. At what height must the blood container be placed so that blood may just enter the vein ? Use the density of whole blood from Table 1.
Answer:
h = \(\frac{p}{p g}=\frac{200}{1.06 \times 10^3}\) × 9.8 = 0.1925 m
The blood may just enter the vein if the height at which the blood container be kept must be slightly greater than 0.1925 m i.e. 0.2 m.

Question 25.
In deriving Bernoulli’s equation, we equated the work done on the fluid in the tube to its change in the potential and kinetic energy.
a) What is the largest average velocity of blood flow in an artery of diameter 2 × 10-3 m if the flow must remain laminar ?
b) Do the dissipative forces become more important as the fluid velocity increases ? Discuss qualitatively.
Answer:
a) If dissipative forces are present, then some forces in liquid flow due to pressure different is spent against dissipative forces. Due to which the pressure drop becomes large.

b) The dissipative forces become more important with increasing flow velocity, because of tubulence.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 26.
a) What is the largest average velocity of blood flow in an artery of radius 2 × 10-3m if the flow must remain lanimar ?
Answer:
Here, r = 2 × 10-3m ;
D = 2r = 2 × 2 × 10-3 = 4 × 10-3m
η = 2.084 × 10-3 Pa s;
p = 1.06 × 103 kgm3
For flow tobe laminar, Nr = 2000
a) Now, Vc = \(\frac{N_r \eta}{\rho D}\)
= \(\frac{2000 \times\left(2.084 \times 10^{-3}\right)}{\left(1.06 \times 10^3\right) \times\left(4 \times 10^{-3}\right)}\) = 0.98m/s.

b) What is the corresponding flow rate ? (Take viscosity of blood to be 2.084 × 10-3 Pa s).
Answer:
Volume flowing per second = πr2Vc
= \(\frac{22}{7}\) × (2 × 10-3)2 × 0.98
= 1.23 × 10-5 m3s-1

Question 27.
A plane is in level flight at constant speed and each of its two wings has an area of 25m2. If the speed of the air is 180 km/h over the lower wing and 234 km/h over the upper wing surface, determine the plane’s mass. (Take air density to be 1 kg m-3)
Answer:
Here, V1 = 180 km/h = 50m/s, V2 = 234 km/ h = 65 m/s;
A = 2 × 25 = 50m2; P = 1kg/m3
P1 – P2 = \(\frac{1}{2}\) p (V22 – V12)
= \(\frac{1}{2}\) × 1 × (652 – 502)
Upward force = (P1 – P2) A = \(\frac{1}{2}\) × (652 – 502) × 50N
As the plane is in level flight, so
mg = (P1 – P2)A
or m = \(\frac{\left(P_1-P_2\right) A}{g}=\frac{1 \times\left(65^2-50^2\right) \times 50}{2 \times 9.8}\)
= 4.4 × 103N

Question 28.
In Millikan’s oil drop experiment, what is the terminal speed of an uncharged drop of radius 2.0 × 10-5 m and density 1.2 × 103 kg m-3. Take the viscosity of air at the temperature of the experiment to be 1.8 × 105 Pa s. How much is the viscous force on the drop at that speed ? Neglect buoyancy of the drop due to air.
Answer:
Here, r = 2.0 × 10-5m; ρ = 1.2 × 103 kg m-3;
η = 1.8 × 105 Ns m-2
P0 = 0, V = ?, F = ?
Terminal velocity V = \(\frac{2 r^2\left(\rho-\rho_0\right) g}{9 \eta}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times\left(2.0 \times 10^{-5}\right)^2 \times\left(1.2 \times 10^3-0\right) \times 9.8}{9 \times 1.8 \times 10^{-5}}\)
= 5.8 × 10-2ms-1 = 5.8 cms-1
Viscous force on the drop, F = 6πηrv
= 6 × \(\frac{22}{7}\) × (1.8 × 10-5) × (2.0 × 10-5) × (5.8 × 10-2)
= 3.93 × 10-10N.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 29.
Mercury has an angle of contact equal to 140° with soda lime glass. A narrow tube of radius 1.00 mm made of this glass is dipped in a trough containing mercury. By what amount does the mercury dip down in the tube relative to the liquid surface outside ? Surface tension of mercury at the temperature of the experiment is 0.456 N m-1. Density of mercury = 1.36 × 103 kg m-3.
Answer:
Here, θ = 140°, r = 1 × 10-3 m;
S = 0.465 Nm-1, ρ = 13.6 × 103 kg, h = ?]
Cos = 140° = – cos40° = -0.7660
Now h = \(\frac{2 S \cos \theta}{r \rho g}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 0.465 \times \cos 140^{\circ}}{10^{-3} \times 13.6 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
= \(\frac{2 \times 0.465 \times(-0.7660)}{10^{-3} \times 13.6 \times 10^3 \times 9.8}\)
= -5.34 × 10-3m
= -5.34mm
Negative value of h shows that the mercury levels is depressed in the tube.

Question 30.
Two narrow bores of diameters 3.0 mm and 6.0 mm are joined together to forma a U-tube open at both ends. If the U-tube contains water, what is the difference in its levels in the two limbs of the tube ? Surface tension of water at the temperature of the experiment is 7.3 × 10-2 N m-1. Take the angle of contact to be zero and density of water to be 1.0 × 103 kg m-3 (g = 9.8 m-2).
Answer:
Here, S = 7.3 -2 Nm-1, ρ = 1.0 × 103 kg m-3; θ = 0°
For narrow tube, 2r1 = 3.00 mm = 3 × 10-3 m or r1 =1.5 × 10-3 m .
For wider tube, 2r2 = 6.00 mm = 6 × 10-3 m or r2 = 3 × 10-3 m
let h1, h2 be the heights to which water rises in narrow tube and wider tube respectively.
Then, h1 = \(\frac{2 s \cos \theta}{r_1 \rho g}\) and h2 = \(\frac{2 s \cos \theta}{r_2 \rho g}\)
∴ Difference in levels of water in two limbs of U-tube is
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 23

Question 31.
a) It is known that density of air decreases with height y as
ρ = ρ0e-y/y0
Where p0 = 1.25 kg m-3 is the density at sea level, and y0 is a constant. This density variation is called the law of atmospheres. Obtain this law assuming that the temperature of atmosphere remains a constant (isothermal conditions). Also assume that the value of g remains constant.
Answer:
We know that the rate of decrease of density p of air is directly proportional to height y i.e.
\(\frac{-d \rho}{d y}\) ∝ p or \(\frac{d \rho}{d y}\) = – Kρ
Where K is a constant of proportionality. Here – ve sign shows that ρ decreases as y increases.
\(\frac{d y}{\rho}\) = – Kρ
Integrating it with in the conditions, as y changes fromotoy density changes from ρ0 to ρ, we have
\(\left.\int_{P_0}^p \frac{d P}{P}=-\int_0^y k d y=\left[\log e^p\right)\right]_{\rho_0}^p=k y\)
\(\frac{\rho}{\rho_0}=e^{-k y}=\rho=\rho_0 e^{-\mathrm{y} / y_0}\)

b) A large He balloon of volume 1425 m3 is used to lift a payload of 400 kg. Assum that the balloon maintains constant radius as it rises. How high does it rise ?
(Take y0 = 8000 m and PHe = 0.18 kgm-3)
Answer:
The balloon will rise to aheight, where its density becomes equal to the air at that height.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 24
y = 8000 × 1 = 8000 m
= 8 km.

Textual Examples

Question 1.
The two thigh bones (femurs), each of cross-sectional area 10 cm2 mass 40 kg. Estimate the average pressure sustained by the femurs.
Answer:
Total cross-sectional area of the femurs is A = 2 × 10 cm2 20 × 10-4 m2. The force acting on them is F = 40 kg wt = 400 N (taking g 10 ms-2). This force is acting vertically down and hence, normally on the femurs. Thus, the average pressure is
Pav = \(\frac{F}{A}\) = 2 × 105 N m-2

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 2.
What is the pressure on a swimmer 10m below the surface of a lake ?
Answer:
Here
h = 10 m and p = 1000 kg m-3.
Take g 10 m S-2
From Equation = P = Pa + ρgh
P = Pa + ρgh
= 1.01 × 105 Pa + 1000 kgm-3 × 10m S-2 × 10 m
= 2.10 × 105 Pa
≈ 2 atm
This is a 100% increase in pressure from surface level. At a depth of 1 km the increase in pressure is 100 atm! Submarines are designed to withstand such enormous pressures.

Question 3.
The density of the atmosphere at sea level is 1.29 kg/m3. Assume that it does not change with altitude. Then how high would the atmosphee extend ?
Answer:
We use P – Pa = ρgh
ρgh = 1.29 kg m-3 × 9.8 ms2 × hm
= 1.01 × 105 pa
∴ h = 7989 m ≈ 8 km
In reality the density of air decreases with height. So does the value of g. The atmospheric cover extends with decreasing press-ure over 100 km. We should also note that the sea level atmospheric pressure is not always 760 mm of Hg. A drop in the Hg level by 10 mm or more is a sign of an approaching storm.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 4.
At a depth of 1000 m in an ocean
(a) What is the absolute pressure ?
b) What is the guage Pressure ?
c) Find the force acting on the window of area 20 cm × 20 cm of a submarine at this depth, the interior of which is maintained at sealevel atmospheric pressure. (The density of sea water is 1.03 × 103 kg m-3, g = 10ms-2.
Answer:
Here h = 1000 m and ρ = 1.03 × 103 kg m-3
a) From P2 – P1 = ρgh absolute pressure
P = Pa + ρgh
= 1.01 × 105 Pa + 1.03 × 103 kg m-3 × 10 m s-2 × 1000 m
= 104.01 × 105 Pa .
= 104 atm

b) Gauge pressure is P – Pa = ρgh = Pg
Pg = 1.03 × 103 kg m-3 × 10 m s2 × 1000 m
= 103 × 105 Pa
≈ 103 atm

c) The pressure outside the submarine is P = Pa + ρgh and the pressure inside it is Pa. Hence, the net pressure acting on the window is gauge pressure, Pg = ρgh. Since the area of the window is A = 0.04 m2, the force acting on it is
F = PgA = 103 × 105 Pa × 0.04m2
= 4.12 × 105 N
≈ 103 atm

Question 5.
Two syringes of different cross sections A1, A2 and lengths L1, L2 (without needles) filled with water are connected with a tightly fitted rubber tube filled with water. Diameters of the smaller piston and larger piston are 1.0 cm and 3.0 cm respectively.
a) Find the force exerted on the larger piston when a force of ION is applied to the smaller piston, b) if the smaller piston is pushed in through 6.0 cm,’how much does the larger piston move out ?
Answer:
a) Since pressure is transmitted undiminished throughout the fluid.
F2 = \(\frac{A_2}{A_1} F_1=\frac{\pi\left(3 / 2 \times 10^{-2} m\right)^2}{\pi\left(1 / 2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2} \times 10 \mathrm{~N}\)
= 90 N

b) Water is considered to be perfectly incompressible. Volume covered by the move-ment of smaller piston inwards is equal to volume moved outwards due to the larger piston.
L1A1 = L2A2
L2 = \(\frac{A_1}{A_2} L_1=\frac{\pi\left(1 / 2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}{\pi\left(3 / 2 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}\)
= × 6 × 10-2m
≃ 0.67 × 10-2m = 0.67 cm.
Note, atmospheric pressure is common to both pistons and has been ignored.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 6.
In a car lift compressed air exerts a force F1 on a small piston having a radius of 5.0 cm. This pressure is transmitted to a second piston or radius 15 cm (Fig). If the mass of the car to be lifted is 1350 kg, calculate F1. What is the pressure necessary to accomplish this task ? (g = 9.8 ms-2).
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 25
Answer:
Since pressure is transmitted undiminished throughout the fluid.
F1 = \(\frac{A_1}{A_2} F_2=\frac{\pi\left(5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}{\pi\left(15 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~m}\right)^2}\)
= (1350 N × 9.8m s-2) = 1470 N
= 1.5 × 103N
The air pressure that will produce this force is
P = \(\frac{F_1}{A_1}=\frac{1.5 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~N}}{p\left(5 \times 10^{-2}\right)^2 \mathrm{~m}}\) = 1.9 × 105 Pa
This is almost double the atmospheric pressure.

Question 7.
Blooc velocity : The flow of blood in a large artery of an anesthetised dog is diverted through a Venturi meter. The wider part of the meter has a cross-sectional area equal to that of the artery. A = 8 mm2. The harrower part has an area = 4mn2. The pressure drop in the artery is 24 Pa. What is the speed of the blood in the artery ?
Answer:
We take the density of blood from whole blood to be 1.06 × 103 kg m3. The ratio of the areas is \(\left(\frac{\mathrm{A}}{\mathrm{a}}\right)\) = 2
Using v1 = \(\left(\sqrt{\frac{2 \rho_m g h}{\rho}}\right)\left(\left(\frac{A}{2}\right)^2-1\right)^{-1 / 2}\)
we obtain
v1 = \(\sqrt{\frac{2 \times 24 \mathrm{pA}}{1060 \mathrm{~kg} \mathrm{~m}^{-3} \times\left(2^2-1\right)}=0.125 \mathrm{~m} \mathrm{~s}^{-1}}\)

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 8.
A fully loaded Boeing aircraft has a mass of 3.3 × 105 kg. Its total wing area is 500 m2. It is in level flight with a speed of 960 km/h. a) Estimate the pressure difference between the lower and upper surfaces of the wings (b) Estimate the fractional increase in the speed of the air on the upper surface of the wing relative to the lower surface. [The density of air is ρ = 1.2 kgm-3].
Answer:
a) The weight of’the Boeing aircraft is balanced by the upward force due to the pressure difference
∆P × A – 3.3 × 105 kg × 9.8 = mg.
∆P = (3.3 × 105 kg × 9.8 m s-2) / 500 m2
= 6.6 × 103 N m-2

b) We ignore the small height difference between the top and bottom sides in
P1 + (\(\frac{1}{2}\)) ρv12 + ρgh1 = P2 + (\(\frac{1}{2}\))ρv22 + ρgh2
The pressure difference between them is then
∆P = \(\frac{\rho}{2}\left(v_2^2-v_1^2\right)\)
Where v2 is the speed of air over the upper surface and v1 is the speed under the bottom surface.
(v2 – v1) = \(\frac{2 \Delta P}{\rho\left(v_2+v_1\right)}\)
Taking the average speed vav (v2 + v1)/2 – 960 km/h = 267 m s-1, we have
(v2 – v1)/vav = \(\frac{\Delta \mathrm{P}}{\rho v_{\mathrm{av}}^2}\) ≈ 0.08
The speed of air above the wing needs to be only 8% higher than that below.

Question 9.
A metal block of area 0.10 m2 is connected to a 0.010 kg mass via a string that passes over an ideal pulley (considered massless and frictionless), as in Fig. A liquid with a film thickness of 0.30 mm is placed between the block and the table. When released, the block moves to the right with a constant speed of 0.085 ms-1. Find the co-efficient of viscosity of the liquid.
AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids 26
Answer:
The metal block moves to the right because of the tension in the string. The tension T is equal in magnitude to the weight of the suspended mass m. Thus the shear force F is
F = T = mg = 0.010 kg × 9.8 ms-2
= 9.8 × 10-2 N
Shear stress on the fluid = F/A = \(\frac{9.8 \times 10^{-2}}{0.10}\)
Strain rate = \(\frac{v}{l}=\frac{0.085 \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}{0.3 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}}\)
η = \(\frac{\text { stress }}{\text { strain rate }}\)
= \(\frac{\left(9.8 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~N}\right)\left(0.30 \times 10^{-3} \mathrm{~m}\right)}{\left(0.085 \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}\right)\left(0.10 \mathrm{~m}^2\right)}\)
= 3.45 × 10-3 Pa s

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 10.
The terminal velocity of a copper ball of radius 2.0 mm falling through a tank of oil at 20°C is 6.5 cm s-1. Compute the viscosity of the oil at 20°C. Density of oil is 1.5 × 103 kg m-3, density of copper is 8.9 × 103 kg m-3.
Answer:
We have vt = 6.5 × 10-2 ms-1,
a = 2 × 10-3m,
g = 9.8 ms-2, ρ = 8.9 × 103 kg m-3,
σ = 1.5 × 103 kg m-3. From
vt = \(\frac{2 a^2(\rho-\sigma) g}{(9 \eta)}\)
η = \(\frac{2}{9} \times \frac{\left(2 \times 10^{-3}\right) \mathrm{m}^2 \times 9.8 \mathrm{~ms}^{-2}}{6.5 \times 10^{-2} \mathrm{~ms}^{-1}}\) × 7.4 × 103 kg m-3
= 9.9 × 10-1 kg m-1s-1

Question 11.
a) The flow rate of water from a tap of diameter 1.25 cm is L7min. The co-efficient of viscosity of water is 10-3 Pa s.
b) After sometime the flow rate is increased to 3L / min. Characterise the flow for both the flow rates.
Answer:
a) Let the speed of the flow be v and the diameter of the tap be d = 1.25 cm. The volume of the water flowing out per second is
Q = v × π d2/4
v = 4Q / d2 π
We then estimate the Reynolds number to be
Re = 4vQ / πdη
= 4 × 103 kg m-3 × Q / (3.14 × 1.25 × 10-2 m × 10-3 Pa S)
= 1.019 × 108 m-3 SQ
Since initially (a)
Q = 0.48 L/min = 8cm3/s
= 8 × 10-6 m3 s-1, we obtain,
Re = 815
Since this is below 1000, the flow is steady.
After some time

b) When Q = 3L/ min = 50 cm3, s = 5 × 10-5 m3 s-1 we obtain,
Re = 5095
The flow will be turbulent. You may carry out an experiment in your washbasin to determine the ransition from laminar to turbulent flow.

AP Inter 1st Year Physics Study Material Chapter 11 Mechanical Properties of Fluids

Question 12.
The lower end of a capillary tube of diameter 2.00 mm is dipped 8.00 cm below the surface of water in a beaker. What is the pressure required in the tube in order to blow a hemispherical bubble at its end in water ? The surface tension of water at temperature of the experiments is 7.30 × 10-2 Nm1. 1 atmospheric pressure = 1.01 × 105 Pa, density of water = 1000 kg/m3, g = 9.8 × ms-2. Also calculate the excess pressure.
Answer:
The excess pressure in a bubble of gas in a liquid is given by 2S / r, where S is the surface tension of the liquid gas interface. You should note there is only one liquid surface in this case. (For a bubble of liquid in a gas, there are two liquid surfaces, so the formula for excess pressure in that case is 4S / r.) The radius of the bubble is r. Now the pressure outside the bubble, within water, P0 equals atmospheric pressure plus the pressure due to 8.00 cm of water column. That is
P0 = (1.01 × 105 Pa + 0.08 m × 1000 kg m-3 × 9.80 m s-2)
= 1.01784 × 105 Pa. .
Therefore, the pressure inside the bubble is
P1 = P0 + 2S / r (as r = 1 mm)
= 1.01784 × 105 Pa + (2 × 7.3 × 10-2 Pa m/10-3 m)
= (1.01784 + 0.00146) × 105 Pa
= 1.02 × 105 Pa
where the radius of the bubble is taken to be equal to the radius of the capillary tube, since the bubble is hemispherical ! (The answer has been rounded off to three significant figures). The excess pressure in the bubble is 146 Pa from (1.0178 + 0.00146) × 105 Pa.